bts3900 hardware description(v100r003_04)(pdf)-en
TRANSCRIPT
BTS3900V100R003
Hardware Description
Issue 04
Date 2011-02-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
i
About This Document
PurposeThis document provides reference for planning and deploying the BTS3900. It describes theconfigurations, functions, and specifications of the subracks, boards, and modules, and thedetails such as cable types, cable connections, and connector specifications.
Product VersionThe following table lists the product version related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
BTS3900 V100R003
Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:
l System engineersl Base station installation engineersl Site maintenance engineers
Organization
1 Changes in the BTS3900 Hardware Description
This describes the changes in the BTS3900 Hardware Description.
2 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet
The BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297standard.
3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
BTS3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iii
This section describes the cabinet, power system, transmission system, CPRI port, andmonitoring system configurations of the BTS3900, and provides reference for planning anddeploying the BTS3900.
4 BTS3900 Components
This describes the components of the BTS3900, which are the BBU3900, RFUs, DCDU-01,FAN unit, DC/DC power system, AC/DC power system and optional modules. The AC/DCpower system is configured in the BTS3900 cabinet (220 V); the DC/DC power system isconfigured in the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V).
5 BTS3900 Cables
This chapter describes the BTS3900 cables. The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable,power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable, signal cable, and RF cable.
6 BTS3900 Auxiliary Equipment
This chapter describes the auxiliary equipment of the BTS3900.
ConventionsSymbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.
Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.
Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.
General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.
About This DocumentBTS3900
Hardware Description
iv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Convention Description
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italics.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.
{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
BTS3900Hardware Description About This Document
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
v
Format Description
Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.
Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.
About This DocumentBTS3900
Hardware Description
vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii
1 Changes in the BTS3900 Hardware Description..................................................................1-1
2 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet..............................................................................................2-1
3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration..........................................................................................3-13.1 Board and Module Configurations..................................................................................................................3-2
3.1.1 Module Configurations in the Cabinet...................................................................................................3-23.1.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900..................................................................................................3-5
3.2 Combinations of Cabinets.............................................................................................................................3-143.3 Power System of the BTS3900.....................................................................................................................3-18
3.3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power Cables...............................................3-193.3.2 Power Distribution of the BTS3900.....................................................................................................3-20
3.4 Transmission Board Configurations..............................................................................................................3-223.5 CPRI Port Configurations.............................................................................................................................3-23
3.5.1 CPRI Port Specifications......................................................................................................................3-233.5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM Only Base Station..................3-253.5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the UMTS Only Base Station................3-273.5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the LTE Only Base Station....................3-293.5.5 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM+UMTS Base Station..............3-313.5.6 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM+LTE Base Station..................3-333.5.7 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the UMTS+LTE Base Station...............3-35
3.6 BTS3900 Monitoring System........................................................................................................................3-363.6.1 BBU Monitoring Port...........................................................................................................................3-363.6.2 Monitoring Principles of the Cabinet ..................................................................................................3-373.6.3 Customized Alarm Inputs.....................................................................................................................3-39
3.7 RF Configurations.........................................................................................................................................3-413.7.1 RFU Configurations.............................................................................................................................3-423.7.2 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM Only Mode.................................3-433.7.3 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in UMTS Only Mode...............................3-463.7.4 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in LTE Only Mode..................................3-473.7.5 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM+UMTS Mode.............................3-503.7.6 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM+LTE Mode.................................3-563.7.7 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in UMTS+LTE Mode..............................3-61
BTS3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
vii
4 BTS3900 Components................................................................................................................4-14.1 BBU3900 Equipment......................................................................................................................................4-3
4.1.1 Exterior of the BBU3900.......................................................................................................................4-34.1.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900.....................................................................................................4-4
4.2 GRFU............................................................................................................................................................4-394.3 DRFU............................................................................................................................................................4-434.4 WRFU...........................................................................................................................................................4-494.5 MRFU............................................................................................................................................................4-534.6 LRFU.............................................................................................................................................................4-574.7 DCDU-01......................................................................................................................................................4-604.8 Fan Box.........................................................................................................................................................4-624.9 GATM...........................................................................................................................................................4-634.10 ELU.............................................................................................................................................................4-654.11 Power Equipment (DC/DC)........................................................................................................................4-65
4.11.1 Components of the Power Equipment (DC/DC)................................................................................4-664.11.2 PSU (DC/DC).....................................................................................................................................4-664.11.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC)....................................................................................................................4-68
4.12 Power Equipment (AC/DC)........................................................................................................................4-694.12.1 Components of the Power Equipment (AC/DC)................................................................................4-694.12.2 PMU...................................................................................................................................................4-704.12.3 PSU (AC/DC).....................................................................................................................................4-734.12.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC)....................................................................................................................4-75
5 BTS3900 Cables...........................................................................................................................5-15.1 List of BTS3900 Cables..................................................................................................................................5-35.2 BTS3900 Cable Connections..........................................................................................................................5-8
5.2.1 Power Cable Connections......................................................................................................................5-95.2.2 Transmission Cable Connections.........................................................................................................5-125.2.3 CPRI Cable Connections......................................................................................................................5-385.2.4 Monitoring Signal Cable Connections.................................................................................................5-505.2.5 RF Cable Connections..........................................................................................................................5-53
5.3 PGND Cables................................................................................................................................................5-665.4 Equipotential Cable.......................................................................................................................................5-675.5 BTS3900 Power Cable..................................................................................................................................5-68
5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.......................................................................................................5-685.5.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01............................................................................................................5-705.5.3 Power Cable for the BBU.....................................................................................................................5-715.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan Box...............................................................................................................5-725.5.5 Power Cable for the RFU.....................................................................................................................5-725.5.6 Power Cable for the GATM.................................................................................................................5-73
5.6 BTS3900 Transmission Cable.......................................................................................................................5-745.6.1 E1/T1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-755.6.2 FE/GE Cable........................................................................................................................................5-77
ContentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
viii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable............................................................................................................................5-785.6.4 Cable Between Two FE Electrical Ports..............................................................................................5-795.6.5 Cable Between Two FE Optical Ports..................................................................................................5-79
5.7 CPRI Electrical Cable...................................................................................................................................5-805.8 BTS3900 Signal Cable..................................................................................................................................5-80
5.8.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU.................................................................................................5-815.8.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)..................................................................................5-825.8.3 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)...................................................................................5-825.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Box............................................................................................5-835.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal Cable............................................................................................................5-845.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU.................................................................................................5-855.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM..............................................................................................5-865.8.8 BBU Alarm Cable................................................................................................................................5-875.8.9 GPS Clock Signal Cable......................................................................................................................5-895.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELU...................................................................................................................5-90
5.9 BTS3900 RF Cable.......................................................................................................................................5-905.9.1 RF Jumper............................................................................................................................................5-915.9.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal Cable..................................................................................................................5-91
6 BTS3900 Auxiliary Equipment................................................................................................6-16.1 PS4890 Cabinet...............................................................................................................................................6-26.2 EMU................................................................................................................................................................6-36.3 DDF.................................................................................................................................................................6-3
BTS3900Hardware Description Contents
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
ix
Figures
Figure 2-1 Exterior of a BTS3900 cabinet...........................................................................................................2-1Figure 2-2 Dimensions of a BTS3900 cabinet.....................................................................................................2-2Figure 3-1 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)............................................................. 3-2Figure 3-2 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)............................................................ 3-3Figure 3-3 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (AC)........................................................................3-3Figure 3-4 Slots in the BBU3900.........................................................................................................................3-5Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode.........................................................................3-6Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode.........................................................................3-8Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode..........................................................................3-9Figure 3-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode.......................................................................3-11Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode........................................................................3-12Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode......................................................................3-14Figure 3-11 Two BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinets installed side by side.............................................................3-15Figure 3-12 Two BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinets installed side by side............................................................3-15Figure 3-13 Two BTS3900 (AC) cabinets installed side by side.......................................................................3-16Figure 3-14 Two stacked BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinets..................................................................................3-17Figure 3-15 Two stacked BTS3900 (AC) cabinets............................................................................................3-18Figure 3-16 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet................................................................3-20Figure 3-17 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinet...............................................................3-21Figure 3-18 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (AC) cabinet..........................................................................3-21Figure 3-19 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................3-25Figure 3-20 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in a single cabinet.....................................................3-26Figure 3-21 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in two cabinets.........................................................3-27Figure 3-22 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................3-28Figure 3-23 CPRI port configuration principles (1)...........................................................................................3-28Figure 3-24 CPRI port configuration principles (2)...........................................................................................3-29Figure 3-25 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................3-30Figure 3-26 CPRI port configuration principles.................................................................................................3-30Figure 3-27 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................3-31Figure 3-28 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (1)....................................................3-32Figure 3-29 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (2)....................................................3-33Figure 3-30 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................3-34Figure 3-31 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs..........................................................3-34
BTS3900Hardware Description Figures
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xi
Figure 3-32 CPRI port configuration principles.................................................................................................3-35Figure 3-33 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU......................................................................................3-37Figure 3-34 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)..............................................................3-38Figure 3-35 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC).............................................................3-38Figure 3-36 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (AC)........................................................................3-39Figure 3-37 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU.....................................................................3-40Figure 3-38 Customized alarms collected by the EMU.....................................................................................3-41Figure 3-39 GSM S4/4/4 (1G+1G+1G).............................................................................................................3-44Figure 3-40 GSM S10/10/8 (2G+2G+2G).........................................................................................................3-44Figure 3-41 GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4 (1G+1G+1G & 1G+1G+1G).....................................................................3-45Figure 3-42 GSM S8/8/8 & S8/8/8 (2G+2G+2G & 2G+2G+2G).....................................................................3-46Figure 3-43 UMTS S1/1/1 (1W+1W+1W)........................................................................................................3-47Figure 3-44 UMTS S4/4/4 (2W+2W+2W)........................................................................................................3-47Figure 3-45 LRFU 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz................................................................................................................3-48Figure 3-46 LRFU 4T4R 3 x 20 MHz................................................................................................................3-49Figure 3-47 LRFU 3 x 20 MHz+MRFU 3 x 20 MHz........................................................................................3-50Figure 3-48 GSM 900M S4/4/4+UMTS 1800M S1/1/1....................................................................................3-52Figure 3-49 GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4+UMTS 1800M S1/1/1...............................................................................3-53Figure 3-50 GSM S4/2/2 & S4/4/4+UMTS 900M S1/1/1.................................................................................3-54Figure 3-51 GSM S4/4/4 & S8/8/8+UMTS 900M S2/2/2 (900M: 2M+2M+2M, 1800M: 2G+2G+2G)..........3-55Figure 3-52 3MRFU+6GRFU+3WRFU............................................................................................................3-56Figure 3-53 MRFU900M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz+MRFU1800M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz..............................................3-57Figure 3-54 MRFU900M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz+6GRFU1800M...........................................................................3-58Figure 3-55 3 x 20 MHz 2T2R...........................................................................................................................3-59Figure 3-56 3GRFU+LRFU 3 x 20 MHz...........................................................................................................3-60Figure 3-57 MRFU900M 3 x 20 MHz+3GRFU1800M+LRFU 3 x 20 MHz....................................................3-61Figure 3-58 UMTS S1/1/1+LTE 3 x 20 MHz....................................................................................................3-62Figure 4-1 BBU3900............................................................................................................................................4-3Figure 4-2 The position of the ESN (1)................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-3 The position of the ESN (2)................................................................................................................4-4Figure 4-4 GTMU panel.......................................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-5 GTMUb panel.....................................................................................................................................4-5Figure 4-6 Panel of the WMPT..........................................................................................................................4-10Figure 4-7 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT......................................................................................4-11Figure 4-8 DIP switches on the WMPT.............................................................................................................4-13Figure 4-9 LMPT................................................................................................................................................4-14Figure 4-10 Panel of the WBBPa.......................................................................................................................4-17Figure 4-11 Panel of the WBBPb.......................................................................................................................4-18Figure 4-12 Panel of the WBBPd.......................................................................................................................4-18Figure 4-13 Panel of the LBBPb........................................................................................................................4-20Figure 4-14 Panel of the LBBPc........................................................................................................................4-20Figure 4-15 FAN panel.......................................................................................................................................4-24
FiguresBTS3900
Hardware Description
xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 4-16 FANc panel.....................................................................................................................................4-24Figure 4-17 UPEUa panel..................................................................................................................................4-25Figure 4-18 UPEUb panel..................................................................................................................................4-26Figure 4-19 UPEUc panel..................................................................................................................................4-26Figure 4-20 Slots in the BBU.............................................................................................................................4-27Figure 4-21 Panel of the UEIU...........................................................................................................................4-28Figure 4-22 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U).........................................................................................................4-29Figure 4-23 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)............................................................................................................4-29Figure 4-24 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports..........................................................................4-32Figure 4-25 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.........................................4-32Figure 4-26 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1 .................................................................................4-32Figure 4-27 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports........................................................................4-33Figure 4-28 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4.............................................................................................4-35Figure 4-29 DIP switch on the UTRPb4............................................................................................................4-36Figure 4-30 Panel of the UBRI...........................................................................................................................4-37Figure 4-31 GRFU panel....................................................................................................................................4-39Figure 4-32 Logical structure of the GRFU.......................................................................................................4-40Figure 4-33 Panel of the DRFU of 900 MHz.....................................................................................................4-44Figure 4-34 Panel of the DRFU of 1800 MHz...................................................................................................4-45Figure 4-35 Logical structure of the DRFU.......................................................................................................4-46Figure 4-36 Panel of the WRFU.........................................................................................................................4-49Figure 4-37 Principle of the WRFU...................................................................................................................4-50Figure 4-38 Panel of the MRFU.........................................................................................................................4-53Figure 4-39 Logical structure of the MRFU......................................................................................................4-54Figure 4-40 Panel of the LRFU..........................................................................................................................4-57Figure 4-41 Logical structure of the LRFU........................................................................................................4-58Figure 4-42 Panel of the DCDU-01...................................................................................................................4-61Figure 4-43 Fan box...........................................................................................................................................4-62Figure 4-44 Ports on the FMU board.................................................................................................................4-62Figure 4-45 GATM panel...................................................................................................................................4-63Figure 4-46 ELU................................................................................................................................................4-65Figure 4-47 Power equipment (DC/DC)............................................................................................................4-66Figure 4-48 Panel of the PSU (DC/DC).............................................................................................................4-67Figure 4-49 Power Subrack (DC/DC)................................................................................................................4-68Figure 4-50 Power equipment (AC/DC)............................................................................................................4-70Figure 4-51 PMU................................................................................................................................................4-70Figure 4-52 Front panel of the PMU..................................................................................................................4-71Figure 4-53 Right panel of the PMU..................................................................................................................4-73Figure 4-54 Panel of the PSU (AC/DC).............................................................................................................4-74Figure 4-55 Panel of the power subrack (AC/DC).............................................................................................4-76Figure 5-1 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V).............................................................................5-9Figure 5-2 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V)..........................................................................5-10
BTS3900Hardware Description Figures
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xiii
Figure 5-3 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (220 V)..........................................................................5-11Figure 5-4 E1/T1 cable connections...................................................................................................................5-12Figure 5-5 E1/T1 cable connections...................................................................................................................5-12Figure 5-6 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-7 FE/GE optical cable connections......................................................................................................5-13Figure 5-8 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-9 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-10 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)........................................................................................... 5-15Figure 5-11 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)........................................................................................... 5-15Figure 5-12 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)..............................................................................................5-15Figure 5-13 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)..............................................................................................5-16Figure 5-14 E1/T1 cable connections.................................................................................................................5-16Figure 5-15 FE/GE optical cable connections....................................................................................................5-17Figure 5-16 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode(1)........................................................................................................................................................................5-17Figure 5-17 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode(2)........................................................................................................................................................................5-18Figure 5-18 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (1).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-18Figure 5-19 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (2).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-19Figure 5-20 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmissionmode (1).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-19Figure 5-21 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmissionmode (2).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-20Figure 5-22 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC..........................................................................................................................5-21Figure 5-23 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC..........................................................................................................................5-21Figure 5-24 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode............................................................... 5-22Figure 5-25 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1).........................................................5-22Figure 5-26 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2).........................................................5-23Figure 5-27 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (1).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-23Figure 5-28 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (2).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-24Figure 5-29 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmissionmode (1).............................................................................................................................................................. 5-24Figure 5-30 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmissionmode....................................................................................................................................................................5-25Figure 5-31 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the base station controller.............................................................................................................. 5-26Figure 5-32 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the base station controller.............................................................................................................. 5-26Figure 5-33 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1).......... 5-27Figure 5-34 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2).......... 5-28
FiguresBTS3900
Hardware Description
xiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-35 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........5-28Figure 5-36 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........5-29Figure 5-37 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)...........5-29Figure 5-38 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)...........5-30Figure 5-39 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (1)..............................................................................................................................................................5-30Figure 5-40 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmissionmode (2)..............................................................................................................................................................5-31Figure 5-41 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1).........................................................................................................................................5-31Figure 5-42 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode...............................................................................................................................................5-32Figure 5-43 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP commontransmission (1)...................................................................................................................................................5-33Figure 5-44 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP commontransmission (2)...................................................................................................................................................5-33Figure 5-45 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1).................................................5-34Figure 5-46 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2).................................................5-35Figure 5-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........5-35Figure 5-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........5-36Figure 5-49 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)........5-36Figure 5-50 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)........5-37Figure 5-51 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).........5-37Figure 5-52 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).........5-38Figure 5-53 Star topology...................................................................................................................................5-39Figure 5-54 Chain topology...............................................................................................................................5-39Figure 5-55 Star topology over CPRI ports........................................................................................................5-40Figure 5-56 Chain topology over CPRI ports....................................................................................................5-40Figure 5-57 Chain topology over CPRI ports on the WBBPd...........................................................................5-41Figure 5-58 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 2T2R configuration...................................................5-41Figure 5-59 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 2T2R configuration...................................................5-42Figure 5-60 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 4T4R configuration...................................................5-42Figure 5-61 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 4T4R configuration...................................................5-43Figure 5-62 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (1).........................................................................................5-43Figure 5-63 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (2).........................................................................................5-44Figure 5-64 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (3).........................................................................................5-44Figure 5-65 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (4).........................................................................................5-44Figure 5-66 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with WRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs (1)........5-45Figure 5-67 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with WRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs (2)........5-46Figure 5-68 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and WRFUs (1).....................5-47Figure 5-69 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and WRFUs (2).....................5-47Figure 5-70 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs..............5-48Figure 5-71 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports...............................................................................................5-49Figure 5-72 CPRI cable connections in co-cabinet mode..................................................................................5-49
BTS3900Hardware Description Figures
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xv
Figure 5-73 CPRI port connection principles.....................................................................................................5-50Figure 5-74 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC)................................................5-51Figure 5-75 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC)...............................................5-52Figure 5-76 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (AC).............................................................................5-53Figure 5-77 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1).............................................................................................5-54Figure 5-78 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2).............................................................................................5-55Figure 5-79 Cable connections with three carriers.............................................................................................5-56Figure 5-80 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers...........................................................................................5-57Figure 5-81 Cable connections with 14 carriers.................................................................................................5-58Figure 5-82 Cable connections with 24 carriers.................................................................................................5-59Figure 5-83 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1).............................................................................................5-60Figure 5-84 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2).............................................................................................5-61Figure 5-85 Cable connections in 2T4R mode...................................................................................................5-62Figure 5-86 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode..............................................................................................5-63Figure 5-87 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode..............................................................................................5-64Figure 5-88 Cable connections in G3U1 mode..................................................................................................5-65Figure 5-89 Cable connections in G9U1 mode..................................................................................................5-66Figure 5-90 PGND cable for the cabinet............................................................................................................5-67Figure 5-91 PGND cable for the modules..........................................................................................................5-67Figure 5-92 Equipotential cable.........................................................................................................................5-67Figure 5-93 -48 V power cable...........................................................................................................................5-68Figure 5-94 +24 V power cable..........................................................................................................................5-69Figure 5-95 AC power cable (220 V AC, single-phase)....................................................................................5-70Figure 5-96 Power cable for the DCDU-01....................................................................................................... 5-71Figure 5-97 Power cable for the BBU................................................................................................................5-71Figure 5-98 Power cable for the fan box............................................................................................................5-72Figure 5-99 Power cable for the RFU................................................................................................................5-73Figure 5-100 Power cable for the GATM..........................................................................................................5-74Figure 5-101 E1/T1 cable...................................................................................................................................5-75Figure 5-102 FE/GE cable..................................................................................................................................5-77Figure 5-103 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)..............................................................................5-78Figure 5-104 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)..............................................................................5-78Figure 5-105 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)..............................................................................5-79Figure 5-106 Cable between two FE electrical ports......................................................................................... 5-79Figure 5-107 Cable between two FE optical ports.............................................................................................5-80Figure 5-108 CPRI electrical cable....................................................................................................................5-80Figure 5-109 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU...........................................................................................5-81Figure 5-110 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)............................................................................5-82Figure 5-111 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).............................................................................5-83Figure 5-112 Monitoring signal cable for the fan box....................................................................................... 5-84Figure 5-113 Fan box cascade signal cable........................................................................................................5-85Figure 5-114 Monitoring signal cable for the EMU...........................................................................................5-86
FiguresBTS3900
Hardware Description
xvi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-115 Monitoring signal cable for the GATM........................................................................................5-87Figure 5-116 BBU alarm cable..........................................................................................................................5-88Figure 5-117 GPS clock signal cable.................................................................................................................5-89Figure 5-118 Signal cable for the ELU..............................................................................................................5-90Figure 5-119 RF jumper.....................................................................................................................................5-91Figure 5-120 Inter-RFU RF signal cable............................................................................................................5-91Figure 6-1 Cable connections between the BTS3900 and the PS4890................................................................6-2Figure 6-2 Structure of the DDF..........................................................................................................................6-3
BTS3900Hardware Description Figures
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xvii
Tables
Table 3-1 Components in the cabinet...................................................................................................................3-4Table 3-2 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode...................................................3-6Table 3-3 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode...................................................3-7Table 3-4 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode...................................................3-8Table 3-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode.................................................3-10Table 3-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode................................................. 3-11Table 3-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode................................................. 3-13Table 3-8 Applicable AC input voltage ranges..................................................................................................3-18Table 3-9 Applicable DC input voltage ranges..................................................................................................3-19Table 3-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables....................... 3-19Table 3-11 Transmission modes supported by the boards................................................................................. 3-22Table 3-12 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the boards in the BBU............................................................3-24Table 3-13 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RFUs.................................................................................3-24Table 3-14 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in a single cabinet......................................................3-26Table 3-15 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in cabinet 1 of the two cabinets.................................3-27Table 3-16 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in cabinet 2 of the two cabinets.................................3-27Table 3-17 CPRI port configuration principles (1)............................................................................................ 3-29Table 3-18 CPRI port configuration principles (2)............................................................................................ 3-29Table 3-19 CPRI port configuration principles..................................................................................................3-30Table 3-20 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (1)......................................................3-32Table 3-21 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (2)......................................................3-33Table 3-22 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs........................................................... 3-34Table 3-23 CPRI port configuration principles..................................................................................................3-36Table 3-24 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU..........................................................................................................3-37Table 3-25 Configuration of monitoring boards in the BTS3900......................................................................3-39Table 3-26 RFU configurations..........................................................................................................................3-42Table 3-27 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs............................................................................................3-44Table 3-28 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs............................................................................................3-45Table 3-29 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs............................................................................................3-45Table 3-30 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a single-band base station...........................................3-48Table 3-31 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a dual-band base station..............................................3-49Table 3-32 Slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and WRFUs.................................................................... 3-51Table 3-33 Slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and WRFUs.................................................................... 3-52
BTS3900Hardware Description Tables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xix
Table 3-34 RFU slot assignment for MRFUs.....................................................................................................3-53Table 3-35 RFU slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and MRFUs............................................................3-54Table 3-36 RFU slot assignment for MRFUs, GRFUs (or DRFUs), and WRFUs............................................3-55Table 3-37 Slot assignment for MRFUs in a dual-band base station.................................................................3-57Table 3-38 Slot assignment for MRFUs and GRFUs in a dual-band base station.............................................3-58Table 3-39 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a dual-band base station..............................................3-58Table 3-40 Slot assignment for DRFUs (or GRFUs) and LRFUs in a dual-band base station..........................3-59Table 3-41 Slot assignment for MRFUs, GRFUs, and LRFUs in a tri-band base station..................................3-60Table 3-42 Slot assignment for WRFUs and LRFUs.........................................................................................3-62Table 4-1 LEDs on the GTMU.............................................................................................................................4-6Table 4-2 LEDs and their status...........................................................................................................................4-6Table 4-3 Ports on the GTMU..............................................................................................................................4-7Table 4-4 Details of the DIP Switch S1...............................................................................................................4-8Table 4-5 Details of the DIP Switch S2...............................................................................................................4-9Table 4-6 Details of the DIP Switch S4...............................................................................................................4-9Table 4-7 Details of the DIP Switch S5...............................................................................................................4-9Table 4-8 LEDs on the WMPT panel.................................................................................................................4-11Table 4-9 LEDs and their status.........................................................................................................................4-12Table 4-10 Ports on the WMPT panel................................................................................................................4-12Table 4-11 Settings of SW1................................................................................................................................4-13Table 4-12 Settings of SW2................................................................................................................................4-14Table 4-13 LEDs on the panel of the LMPT......................................................................................................4-15Table 4-14 Ports and LEDs................................................................................................................................4-16Table 4-15 Ports on the panel of the LMPT.......................................................................................................4-17Table 4-16 Specifications of the WBBP.............................................................................................................4-18Table 4-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status................................................................................................4-19Table 4-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................4-19Table 4-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb..............................................................................4-20Table 4-20 Ports on the WBBPd........................................................................................................................4-20Table 4-21 Specifications of the LBBP..............................................................................................................4-21Table 4-22 Specifications of the LBBP..............................................................................................................4-21Table 4-23 LEDs on the LBBP...........................................................................................................................4-22Table 4-24 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links.....................................................................................4-22Table 4-25 Ports on the LBBP............................................................................................................................4-23Table 4-26 LED on the FAN panel....................................................................................................................4-25Table 4-27 LED on the panel of the UPEU........................................................................................................4-27Table 4-28 Description on the ports...................................................................................................................4-27Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the UEIU........................................................................................................4-29Table 4-30 LEDs on the USCU..........................................................................................................................4-30Table 4-31 LEDs on the TOD port.....................................................................................................................4-31Table 4-32 Ports on the USCU...........................................................................................................................4-31Table 4-33 Specifications of the UTRP..............................................................................................................4-32
TablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
xx Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-34 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP......................................................................................................4-33Table 4-35 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9...................................................................4-34Table 4-36 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports............................................................................4-35Table 4-37 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s..........................4-35Table 4-38 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1......................................................................................4-35Table 4-39 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports........................................................................4-35Table 4-40 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................4-36Table 4-41 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................4-36Table 4-42 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP.........................................................................................................4-37Table 4-43 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.......................................................................................................4-38Table 4-44 CPRI link status LED.......................................................................................................................4-38Table 4-45 Ports on the panel of the UBRI........................................................................................................4-39Table 4-46 LEDs on the GRFU panel................................................................................................................4-41Table 4-47 Ports on the GRFU panel................................................................................................................. 4-42Table 4-48 Status of the LEDs on the DRFU.....................................................................................................4-47Table 4-49 Ports and sockets on the DRFU....................................................................................................... 4-48Table 4-50 LEDs on the MRFU panel................................................................................................................4-51Table 4-51 Ports on the WRFU panel................................................................................................................ 4-52Table 4-52 LEDs on the panel of the MRFU..................................................................................................... 4-55Table 4-53 Ports on the panel of the MRFU...................................................................................................... 4-56Table 4-54 LEDs on the LRFU.......................................................................................................................... 4-59Table 4-55 Ports on the panel of the LRFU........................................................................................................4-60Table 4-56 Ports, terminals, and power switches on the panel of the DCDU-01...............................................4-61Table 4-57 LEDs on the FMU board..................................................................................................................4-63Table 4-58 Ports on the FMU board...................................................................................................................4-63Table 4-59 LEDs on the GATM.........................................................................................................................4-64Table 4-60 Ports and socket on the GATM........................................................................................................4-65Table 4-61 Components of the power equipment (DC/DC)...............................................................................4-66Table 4-62 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (DC/DC)......................................................................................... 4-67Table 4-63 Ports and terminals on the power subrack (DC/DC)........................................................................4-69Table 4-64 Components of the power equipment (AC/DC)...............................................................................4-70Table 4-65 Ports and switch on the PMU...........................................................................................................4-71Table 4-66 LEDs on the panel of the PMU........................................................................................................4-72Table 4-67 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC)......................................................................................... 4-74Table 4-68 Terminals and switch on the power subrack (AC/DC)....................................................................4-76Table 5-1 Power Cables and PGND Cables.........................................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 Transmission Cables............................................................................................................................5-5Table 5-3 CPRI Cables.........................................................................................................................................5-6Table 5-4 Signal Cables........................................................................................................................................5-7Table 5-5 RF Cables.............................................................................................................................................5-8Table 5-6 Power cables of the BTS3900 (-48 V)...............................................................................................5-10Table 5-7 Power cables of the BTS3900 (+24 V)..............................................................................................5-10
BTS3900Hardware Description Tables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxi
Table 5-8 Power cables of the BTS3900 (220 V).............................................................................................. 5-11Table 5-9 E1/T1 cable connections....................................................................................................................5-12Table 5-10 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................5-13Table 5-11 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections...................................................................................................5-13Table 5-12 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................5-13Table 5-13 E1/T1 cable connections (1).............................................................................................................5-14Table 5-14 E1/T1 cable connections (2).............................................................................................................5-14Table 5-15 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1).............................................................................................5-15Table 5-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2).............................................................................................5-15Table 5-17 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)................................................................................................5-16Table 5-18 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)................................................................................................5-16Table 5-19 E1/T1 cable connections..................................................................................................................5-17Table 5-20 FE/GE optical cable connections.....................................................................................................5-17Table 5-21 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-18Table 5-22 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmission mode (2).............................................................................................................................................................................5-18Table 5-23 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-19Table 5-24 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2).............................................................................................................................................................................5-19Table 5-25 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmissionmode (1)..............................................................................................................................................................5-20Table 5-26 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FE common transmissionmode (2)..............................................................................................................................................................5-20Table 5-27 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to theBSC and RNC.....................................................................................................................................................5-21Table 5-28 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to theBSC and RNC.....................................................................................................................................................5-22Table 5-29 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode.................................................................5-22Table 5-30 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)..........................................................5-23Table 5-31 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)..........................................................5-23Table 5-32 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-24Table 5-33 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2).............................................................................................................................................................................5-24Table 5-34 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-25Table 5-35 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode.............................................................................................................................................................................5-25Table 5-36 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical ports connected to thebase station controller..........................................................................................................................................5-26Table 5-37 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical ports connected to thebase station controller..........................................................................................................................................5-27Table 5-38 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............5-27Table 5-39 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............5-28
TablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
xxii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-40 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)............5-28Table 5-41 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)............5-29Table 5-42 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1).............5-29Table 5-43 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2).............5-30Table 5-44 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-30Table 5-45 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 common transmission mode (2).............................................................................................................................................................................5-31Table 5-46 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode (1).............................................................................................................................................................................5-32Table 5-47 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE common transmission mode.............................................................................................................................................................................5-32Table 5-48 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission(1)........................................................................................................................................................................5-33Table 5-49 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IP common transmission(2)........................................................................................................................................................................5-34Table 5-50 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1).....................................................................5-34Table 5-51 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2).....................................................................5-35Table 5-52 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........5-35Table 5-53 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........5-36Table 5-54 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........5-37Table 5-55 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........5-37Table 5-56 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (1)..........5-38Table 5-57 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode (2)..........5-38Table 5-58 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC).................................................5-51Table 5-59 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC).................................................5-52Table 5-60 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (AC)..............................................................................5-53Table 5-61 -48 V power cable............................................................................................................................5-68Table 5-62 +24 V power cable...........................................................................................................................5-69Table 5-63 220 V power cable...........................................................................................................................5-70Table 5-64 Power cable for the DCDU-01.........................................................................................................5-71Table 5-65 Pin assignment of the power cable for the BBU..............................................................................5-72Table 5-66 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan box.....................................................5-72Table 5-67 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the RFU.........................................................5-73Table 5-68 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the GATM.....................................................5-74Table 5-69 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.....................................................................................5-75Table 5-70 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.........................................................5-76Table 5-71 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable................................................5-76Table 5-72 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable............................................................................5-78Table 5-73 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PMU......................................5-81Table 5-74 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)........................5-83Table 5-75 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan box...................................5-84Table 5-76 Pin assignment of the fan box cascade signal cable.........................................................................5-85Table 5-77 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMU......................................5-86
BTS3900Hardware Description Tables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
xxiii
Table 5-78 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the GATM...................................5-87Table 5-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.....................................................................5-88Table 5-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU..........................................................5-90Table 6-1 Cables between the BTS3900 and the PS4890....................................................................................6-2Table 6-2 Technical specifications of the DDF....................................................................................................6-4
TablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
xxiv Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
1 Changes in the BTS3900 HardwareDescription
This describes the changes in the BTS3900 Hardware Description.
04 (2011-02-15)This is the third commercial release.
Compared with issue 03 (2010-10-25), no topic is added.
Compared with issue 03 (2010-10-25), this issue incorporates the following change:
Contents Change Description
FAN The description of the FANc is added.
UPEU The description of the UPEUc is added.
3.1.2 Board Configurations of theBBU3900
The configuration restriction is modified.
Compared with issue 03 (2010-10-25), no information is deleted.
03 (2010-10-25)This is the second commercial release.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no topic is added.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), this issue incorporates the following change:
Contents Change Description
2 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet The dimensions of the BTS3900 cabinet isadded.
Compared with issue 02 (2010-08-30), no information is deleted.
BTS3900Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BTS3900 Hardware Description
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
1-1
02 (2010-08-30)This is the first commercial release.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), this issue is added with the following topic:l FMUl 4.3 DRFUl 3.5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the LTE Only Base
Stationl 3.5.6 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM+LTE Base
Stationl 3.5.7 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the UMTS+LTE
Base Stationl RF Configurationsl CPRI Cable Connections in the LTE Only Base Stationl CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+LTE Base Stationl CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station
Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), the following part is modified:
Part Modification
3.5.1 CPRI Port Specifications LBBPb, LBBPc, and LRFU are added.
Compared with issue 01 (2010-05-04), no information is deleted.
01 (2010-05-04)This is the draft release.
1 Changes in the BTS3900 Hardware DescriptionBTS3900
Hardware Description
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
2 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet
The BTS3900 cabinet is a vertical cabinet, which is designed in compliance with the IEC297standard.
Figure 2-1 shows the exterior of a BTS3900 cabinet.
Figure 2-1 Exterior of a BTS3900 cabinet
Figure 2-2 shows the dimensions of a BTS3900 cabinet.
BTS3900Hardware Description 2 Exterior of the BTS3900 Cabinet
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
2-1
Figure 2-2 Dimensions of a BTS3900 cabinet
2 Exterior of the BTS3900 CabinetBTS3900
Hardware Description
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
About This Chapter
This section describes the cabinet, power system, transmission system, CPRI port, andmonitoring system configurations of the BTS3900, and provides reference for planning anddeploying the BTS3900.
3.1 Board and Module ConfigurationsThis chapter describes the configuration principles of the boards and modules in the cabinet.
3.2 Combinations of CabinetsThe BTS3900 cabinets can be stacked or installed side by side. The side-by-side installationmode is recommended. If the space in the equipment room is insufficient, the stack mode canbe used.
3.3 Power System of the BTS3900The BTS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supplies. When AC poweris supplied, the power is converted to -48 V DC power for the base station.
3.4 Transmission Board ConfigurationsIn different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signaltransmission.
3.5 CPRI Port ConfigurationsThis section describes the specifications and cable connections of the CPRI ports on boards andmodules.
3.6 BTS3900 Monitoring SystemThe BTS3900 monitoring system monitors all boards and components in the cabinet. If anyboard or component is faulty, an alarm is reported automatically. The alarm signals are collectedboth inside and outside the cabinet by the UPEU, UEIU, or EMU, so that the entire site can bemonitored.
3.7 RF ConfigurationsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, LRFUs, or MRFUs.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-1
3.1 Board and Module ConfigurationsThis chapter describes the configuration principles of the boards and modules in the cabinet.
3.1.1 Module Configurations in the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet uses a modular design. The main components of the cabinet are theBBU3900, RFU, DCDU-01, and fan box. The power equipment (DC/DC) and power equipment(AC/DC) are optional components of the cabinet.
3.1.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900This section describes the board configurations of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafterreferred to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referredto as LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to asGL), and UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL) scenarios.
3.1.1 Module Configurations in the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet uses a modular design. The main components of the cabinet are theBBU3900, RFU, DCDU-01, and fan box. The power equipment (DC/DC) and power equipment(AC/DC) are optional components of the cabinet.
The BTS3900 cabinets can be classified into three types: the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC),BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC), and BTS3900 cabinet (AC).
Figure 3-1 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)
(1) RFU (2) Fan box (3) Air inlet
(4) BBU3900 (5) DCDU-01 -
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-2 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)
(1) RFU (2) Fan box (3) Air inlet
(4) BBU3900 (5) DCDU-01 (6) Power equipment (DC/DC)
Figure 3-3 Module configurations in the BTS3900 cabinet (AC)
(1) RFU (2) Fan box (3) Air inlet
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-3
(4) BBU3900 (5) DCDU-01 (6) Power equipment (AC/DC)
Table 3-1 describes the components in the cabinet.
Table 3-1 Components in the cabinet
Module Optional orMandatory
MaximumNumber ofBoards orModulesConfiguredin a SingleCabinet
Remarks
RFU Optional 6 The RFU performs modulation anddemodulation between baseband signals andRF signals, processes data, and combines anddivides signals.
RFU fillerpanel
Optional 6 To ensure proper ventilation of the cabinet, theslot in the RFU subrack that is not installedwith an RFU must be installed with a fillerpanel.
Fan box Mandatory 1 The fan dissipates the heat in the cabinet.
BBU3900 Optional 1 The BBU3900 processes the baseband signalsand enables interaction between the basestation and the base station controller.
DCDU-01 Mandatory 1 The DCDU-01 provides DC power to allcomponents in the cabinet.
Powerequipment(DC/DC)
Optional 1 The power equipment (DC/DC) convertsexternal +24 V DC power into -48 V DC powerand provides power to all components in thecabinet.
Powerequipment(AC/DC)
Optional 1 The power equipment (AC/DC) convertsexternal 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V ACthree-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wirepower into -48 V DC power and providespower to all components in the cabinet.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Module Optional orMandatory
MaximumNumber ofBoards orModulesConfiguredin a SingleCabinet
Remarks
Idle space - - l There is a 3 U idle space in the BTS3900cabinet (-48 V DC) for customizedequipment.– The customized equipment must be
able to work properly at a temperatureequal to or higher than 55OC.
– The BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)cannot supply power to customizedtransmission equipment.
l There is no idle space in the BTS3900cabinet (+24 V DC).
l There is no idle space in the BTS3900cabinet (AC).
3.1.2 Board Configurations of the BBU3900This section describes the board configurations of the BBU3900 in the GSM Only (hereinafterreferred to as GO), UMTS Only (hereinafter referred to as UO), LTE Only (hereinafter referredto as LO), GSM+UMTS (hereinafter referred to as GU), GSM+LTE (hereinafter referred to asGL), and UMTS+LTE (hereinafter referred to as UL) scenarios.
Slots in the BBU3900The board configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode, BBU3900 in GU mode, BBU3900 inUO mode, BBU3900 in LO mode, BBU3900 in GL mode, and BBU3900 in UL mode are thesame, as shown in Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-4 Slots in the BBU3900
BBU3900 in GO ModeTable 3-2 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-5
Table 3-2 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
Figure 3-5 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GO mode.
Figure 3-5 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GO mode
BBU3900 in UO ModeTable 3-3 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 3-3 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
WMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or slot 7 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 7 in the caseof a singleWMPT
WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 Configured inslot 3 by default:l If an
expansion ofthe CPRIport isrequired,configurethe board inslot 2.
l If anexpansion ofthe CPRIport is notrequired,configurethe board in aslot, withslot priorityof slot 0, slot1, and slot 2.
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 4 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, and slot 5
Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 5, slot 0, andslot 1
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-7
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
USCU Optional 1 Slot 1 or slot 0 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
Figure 3-6 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UO mode.
Figure 3-6 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UO mode
BBU3900 in LO Mode
Table 3-4 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode.
Table 3-4 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in LO mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 2 Slot 6 or slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7 in thecase of a singleLMPT
LBBP Mandatory 3 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 1, and slot 2in the case of asingle LBBP
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 1 Slot 4 or slot 5 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 4
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, or slot 5
Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 5 in the caseof a singleUSCU;configured inslot 5 in the caseof 1 U USCU (inthis case, slot 4is also occupied)Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1 if slot 4and slot 5 areoccupied;configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U USCU (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
Figure 3-7 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in LO mode.
Figure 3-7 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in LO mode
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-9
BBU3900 in GU ModeTable 3-5 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode.
Table 3-5 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GU mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)
WBBP Mandatory 4 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 0, slot 1, andslot 2
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 4
Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 0, and slot 1
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot ConfigurationRestriction
UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 ForV100R003C01,the UBRI can beinstalled in slot1 or 2, and it ispreferrentiallyinstalled in slot2.
Figure 3-8 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GU mode.
Figure 3-8 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GU mode
BBU3900 in GL Mode
Table 3-6 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode.
Table 3-6 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in GL mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7
GTMU Mandatory 1 Slots 5 and 6 Configured onlyin slot 6 (bothslots 5 and 6 areoccupied)
LBBP Mandatory 3 Slots 0 to 3 Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 1, and slot 2
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-11
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 4
Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 0, and slot 1The slot priorityof the GO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
UBRI Optional 1 Slot 2 ForV100R003C01,the UBRI can beinstalled in slot1 or 2, and it ispreferrentiallyinstalled in slot2.
Figure 3-9 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in GL mode.
Figure 3-9 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in GL mode
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BBU3900 in UL ModeTable 3-7 describes the principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode.
Table 3-7 Principles for configuring the boards in the BBU3900 in UL mode
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
LMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 6 Configured onlyin slot 6
WMPT Mandatory 1 Slot 7 Configured onlyin slot 7
LBBP Mandatory 2 Slot 1 and slot 2 Configured onlyin slot 2 in thecase of a singleLBBP
WBBP Mandatory 3 Slot 0, slot 1, orslot 3
Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 3,slot 0, and slot 1in the case of asingle WBBP
FAN Mandatory 1 Slot 16 Configured onlyin slot 16
UPEU Mandatory 2 Slot 18 or slot 19 Configured onlyin slot 19 in thecase of a singleUPEU
UEIU Optional 1 Slot 18 -
UTRP Optional 2 Slot 0, slot 1,slot 4, or slot 5
Configured in aslot, with slotpriority of slot 4,slot 5, slot 0, andslot 1The slot priorityof the UO UTRPis higher thanthat of the LOUTRP
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-13
Board Optional/Mandatory
MaximumQuantity
Slot Remarks
USCU Optional 1 Slot 0 or slot 1 Preferentiallyconfigured inslot 1Configured inslot 1 in the caseof 1 U dual-satellite-card (inthis case, slot 0is also occupied)
Figure 3-10 shows the typical configurations of the BBU3900 in UL mode.
Figure 3-10 Typical configuration of the BBU3900 in UL mode
3.2 Combinations of CabinetsThe BTS3900 cabinets can be stacked or installed side by side. The side-by-side installationmode is recommended. If the space in the equipment room is insufficient, the stack mode canbe used.
Side-by-Side Installation ModeThe principles for installing two cabinets side by side are as follows:l By default, the primary cabinet is positioned on the left, and the secondary cabinet is
positioned on the right. If restricted by the actual situation in the equipment room, theprimary cabinet can be positioned on the right.
l The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet, BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinet, and BTS3900 (AC)cabinet support side-by-side installation mode.
NOTE
l The primary cabinet is the cabinet that is configured with the BBU.
l The secondary cabinet is the cabinet that is not configured with the BBU.
Figure 3-11, Figure 3-12, and Figure 3-13 show the side-by-side installation mode with twocabinets.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-11 Two BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinets installed side by side
Figure 3-12 Two BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinets installed side by side
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-15
Figure 3-13 Two BTS3900 (AC) cabinets installed side by side
Stack ModeThe principles for stacking two cabinets are as follows:l By default, the primary cabinet is stacked under the secondary cabinet.l The BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinets can be stacked.l The BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinets cannot be stacked.l The stacking of the BTS3900 (AC) cabinets is not recommended. If cabinets are stacked,
the highest operating temperature of the cabinets is 50°C.
Figure 3-14 and Figure 3-15 show the stack mode with two cabinets.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-14 Two stacked BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinets
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-17
Figure 3-15 Two stacked BTS3900 (AC) cabinets
3.3 Power System of the BTS3900The BTS3900 supports 110 V AC, 220 V AC, and -48 V DC power supplies. When AC poweris supplied, the power is converted to -48 V DC power for the base station.
Table 3-8 and Table 3-9 list the input voltage ranges supported by the BTS3900.
Table 3-8 Applicable AC input voltage ranges
Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage
220 V AC single-phase 220 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Power Input Type Rated Voltage Working Voltage
220 V AC three-phase 220 V AC to 240 V AC 176 V AC to 290 V AC
110 V AC dual-live-wire 100 V AC to 120 V AC 90 V AC to 135 V AC
Table 3-9 Applicable DC input voltage ranges
Power Input Type Rated Voltage
-48 V DC -38.4 V DC to -57 V DC
+24 V DC 21.6 V DC to 29 V DC
3.3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and Power CablesThis section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are based on a fully-configuredsingle cabinet, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customerequipment in the cabinet are also included.
3.3.2 Power Distribution of the BTS3900This section describes the power distribution modes of the BTS3900.
3.3.1 Configurations of the Upper-Level Circuit Breaker and PowerCables
This section describes the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker andpower cables for the BTS3900. The recommended configurations are based on a fully-configuredsingle cabinet, which has the peak output power. The power requirements for the customerequipment in the cabinet are also included.
Table 3-10 lists the recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and powercables for the BTS3900.
Table 3-10 Recommended configurations of the upper-level circuit breaker and power cables
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreakers onCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
-48 V DC 2 x 80 A 16 mm2 ≤ 15 m
+24 V DC 1 x 160 A or 2 x 100A
25 mm2 ≤ 15 m
200 V AC single-phase
1 x 63 A or 1 x 50 A(both using the two-
6 mm2 ≤ 40 m
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-19
Power Supply Requirement forthe CircuitBreakers onCustomerEquipment
Cross-SectionalArea of the PowerCable
Length of thePower Cable
110 V AC dual-live-wire
level magnetic blastbreaker)
220 V AC three-phase
1 x 25 A or 1 x 32 A(both using the three-level magnetic blastbreaker)
2.5 mm2 ≤ 40 m
NOTE
All power cables must comply with local standards.
3.3.2 Power Distribution of the BTS3900This section describes the power distribution modes of the BTS3900.
Power Distribution of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) Cabinet
The external power equipment supplies -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01 of the BTS3900 (-48V DC) cabinet, and the DCDU-01 feeds power to each module in the BTS3900 cabinet. Figure3-16 shows the power distribution principles.
Figure 3-16 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) cabinet
NOTE
MCB: miniature circuit breaker
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Power Distribution of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC) CabinetThe external power equipment supplies +24 V DC power to the power equipment (DC/DC) ofthe BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinet. The power equipment (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC powerinto -48 V DC power and feeds -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. The DCDU-01 feeds powerto each module in the cabinet. Figure 3-17 shows the power distribution principles.
Figure 3-17 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC) cabinet
Power Distribution of the BTS3900 (AC) CabinetThe external power equipment supplies 220 V AC single-phase or three-phase power, or 110 VAC dual-live-wire power to the BTS3900 (AC) cabinet. The power equipment (AC/DC) convertsthe AC power into -48 V DC power and feeds the -48 V DC power to the DCDU-01. TheDCDU-01 feeds power to each module in the cabinet. Figure 3-18 shows the power distributionprinciples.
Figure 3-18 Power distribution of the BTS3900 (AC) cabinet
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-21
3.4 Transmission Board ConfigurationsIn different modes, different transmission boards can be configured for E1/T1 or FE signaltransmission.
Table 3-11 lists the transmission modes supported by the boards working in different modes.
Table 3-11 Transmission modes supported by the boards
TransmissionMode
Board GSM/UMTSMode
Port Port Capacity
ATM over E1/T1
WMPT UMTS 1 Four channels
UTRP3 UMTS 2 Eight channels
IP over E1/T1 GTMU/GTMUb
GSM 1 Four channels
WMPT UMTS 1 Four channels
UTRP4 UMTS 2 Eight channels
UTRPb4 LTE 2 Eight channels
TDM over E1/T1
GTMU/GTMUb
GSM 1 Four channels
UTRPb4 GSM 1 Four channels
Transmissionover FE/GEoptical cable
GTMU/GTMUb
GSM 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s
LMPT LTE 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s
WMPT UMTS 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s
UTRP2 UMTS 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s
Transmissionover FE/GEelectrical cable
GTMU/GTMUb
GSM 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s
LMPT LTE 2 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s
WMPT UMTS 1 10 Mbit/s and100 Mbit/s
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
TransmissionMode
Board GSM/UMTSMode
Port Port Capacity
UTRP9 UMTS 4 10 Mbit/s, 100Mbit/s, and1000 Mbit/s
NOTE
l The GTMU/GTMUb is mandatory for the GSM mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals aremore than four, the UTRPb4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission.
l The WMPT is mandatory for the UMTS mode. When the channels of the E1/T1 signals are more thanfour, the UTRP3 or UTRP4 must be configured for E1/T1 signal transmission. When the transmissionrate for the FE optical cable is higher than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP2 must be configured. When thetransmission rate for the FE electrical cable is more than 100 Mbit/s, the UTRP9 must be configured.
l The transmission over FE/GE optical cable is recommended for the LMPT.
3.5 CPRI Port ConfigurationsThis section describes the specifications and cable connections of the CPRI ports on boards andmodules.
3.5.1 CPRI Port SpecificationsThe base station configurations are affected by the number, transmission rate, and supportedtopology of CPRI ports on the RFUs and BBU.
3.5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM Only Base StationWhen a base station works in GSM mode, the DRFUs/GRFUs in the slots of the cabinet areconnected to the CPRI ports on the GTMU.
3.5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the UMTS Only Base StationWhen a base station works in UMTS mode, the WRFUs in the slots of the cabinet are connectedto the WBBPbs/WBBPds in the BBU.
3.5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the LTE Only Base StationWhen a base station works in LTE only mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the LRFUs.
3.5.5 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the MRFUs, andthe boards configured in the BBU are the GTMU, UBRI, WMPT, and WBBPb/WBBPd.
3.5.6 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the GSM+LTE Base StationWhen a base station works in GSM+LTE mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the MRFUs, andthe boards configured in the BBU are the GTMU, UBRI, LMPT, and LBBP.
3.5.7 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in the UMTS+LTE Base StationWhen a base station works in UMTS+LTE mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the WRFUs andLRFUs, and the boards configured in the BBU are the WMPT, WBBP, LMPT, and LBBP.
3.5.1 CPRI Port SpecificationsThe base station configurations are affected by the number, transmission rate, and supportedtopology of CPRI ports on the RFUs and BBU.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-23
Specifications of the CPRI Ports on the BBUTable 3-12 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the boards in the BBU.
Table 3-12 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the boards in the BBU
Board Number of CRPIPorts
TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort
SupportedTopology
GTMU 6 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring
GTMUb 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
UBRI 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
WBBPa 3 1.25 Gbit/s Star, chain, or ring
WBBPb 3 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
WBBPd 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
LBBPb 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
LBBPc 6 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s or 4.9 Gbit/s
Star, chain, or ring
Specifications of the CPRI Ports on the RFUsTable 3-13 lists the specifications of the CPRI ports on the RFUs.
Table 3-13 Specifications of the CPRI ports on the RFUs
RFU Number of CRPIPorts
TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort
SupportedTopology
DRFU 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star or chain
GRFU 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star or chain
WRFU 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star or chain
MRFU 2 1.25 Gbit/s Star
MRFU V2 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
RFU Number of CRPIPorts
TransmissionRate of the CPRIPort
SupportedTopology
LRFU 2 1.25 Gbit/s or 2.5Gbit/s
Star
3.5.2 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theGSM Only Base Station
When a base station works in GSM mode, the DRFUs/GRFUs in the slots of the cabinet areconnected to the CPRI ports on the GTMU.
Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The DRFU/GRFU supports star and chain topologies.
l The DRFUs can be connected over the CPRI ports with a maximum of three levels ofcascading, the GRFUs can be connected over the CPRI ports with a maximum of two levelsof cascading, and the DRFUs and GRFUs can be connected over the CPRI ports with amaximum of two levels of cascading. The data transmission rates over the CPRI ports ofthe cascaded DRFUs/GRFUs are the same.
l The DRFUs/GRFUs cannot be connected to the RRU.
Figure 3-19 shows the CPRI connection principles.
Figure 3-19 CPRI port connection principles
CPRI Port Configuration Principlesl Each CPRI port on the GTMU corresponds to a sector.
l The CRPI1 port on the DRFU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI0 port is connectedto the lower-level RFU.
l The CRPI0 port on the GRFU is connected to the GTMU, and the CPRI1 port is connectedto the lower-level RFU.
l The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station with a single cabinet are shown inFigure 3-20 and listed in Table 3-14. The CPRI ports corresponding to an idle slot in thecabinet are idle.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-25
Figure 3-20 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in a single cabinet
Table 3-14 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in a single cabinet
SlotNumberof theDRFU/GRFU
0 1 2 3 4 5
Numberof theCPRIPort ontheGTMU
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
l The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station with two cabinets are shown in
Figure 3-21 and listed in Table 3-15 and Table 3-16.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-21 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in two cabinets
Table 3-15 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in cabinet 1 of the two cabinets
Slot Number of theDRFU/GRFU
0 and 1 2 and 3 4 and 5
Number of theCPRI Port on theGTMU
CPRI0 CPRI2 CPRI4
Table 3-16 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports in cabinet 2 of the two cabinets
Slot Number of theDRFU/GRFU
0 and 1 2 and 3 4 and 5
Number of theCPRI Port on theGTMU
CPRI1 CPRI3 CPRI5
3.5.3 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theUMTS Only Base Station
When a base station works in UMTS mode, the WRFUs in the slots of the cabinet are connectedto the WBBPbs/WBBPds in the BBU.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-27
Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The WRFU supports star and chain topologies.l The WRFUs can be connected over the CPRI ports with a maximum of two levels of
cascading. The two cascaded WRFUs work in the same sector and the data transmissionrates over the CPRI ports on the two WRFUs are the same.
l The WRFU cannot be connected to the RRU.
Figure 3-22 shows the CPRI connection principles.
Figure 3-22 CPRI port connection principles
CPRI Port Configuration Principlesl Each CPRI port on the WBBPb/WBBPd corresponds to a sector.l The CRPI0 port on the WRFU is connected to the WBBP, and the CPRI1 port is connected
to the lower-level WRFU.l The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station configured with WBBPbs are
shown in Figure 3-23 and listed in Table 3-17.
Figure 3-23 CPRI port configuration principles (1)
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 3-17 CPRI port configuration principles (1)
MRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
Numberof theWBBPbin Slot3
CPRI0 - CPRI1 - CPRI2 -
l The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station configured with WBBPds are
shown in Figure 3-24 and listed in Table 3-17.
Figure 3-24 CPRI port configuration principles (2)
Table 3-18 CPRI port configuration principles (2)
MRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
Numberof theWBBPdin Slot3
CPRI0 - CPRI2 - CPRI4 -
3.5.4 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theLTE Only Base Station
When a base station works in LTE only mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the LRFUs.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-29
Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The LRFU can work in the star topology. The chain topology is not supported.
l The LRFU cannot be connected to the RRU.
Figure 3-25 shows the CPRI connection principles.
Figure 3-25 CPRI port connection principles
CPRI Port Configuration Principlesl The CPRI0 port on the LRFU is connected to the LBBP.
The CPRI port configuration principles are shown in Figure 3-26 and listed in Table 3-19.
Figure 3-26 CPRI port configuration principles
Table 3-19 CPRI port configuration principles
LRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Numberof theCPRIPort onthe LBBPin Slot 3
CPRI0 - CPRI2 - CPRI4 -
3.5.5 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theGSM+UMTS Base Station
When a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the MRFUs, andthe boards configured in the BBU are the GTMU, UBRI, WMPT, and WBBPb/WBBPd.
Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The MRFU can work in dual-star topology rather than chain topology.l When the MRFU works in dual-star topology, the signals in the same mode cannot be
transmitted over two CPRI links.l The MRFU cannot be connected to the RRU.
Figure 3-27 shows the CPRI port connection principles for the MRFUs working in GSM+UMTSmode.
Figure 3-27 CPRI port connection principles
CPRI Port Configuration Principles
In co-cabinet mode, the CPRI port configuration principles of the DRFUs/GRFUs and WRFUsfollow the configuration principles in GSM and UMTS modes respectively.
In co-module mode, the CPRI port configuration principles are as follows:l The CPRI0 port on the MRFU is connected to the GTMU or UBRI for GSM data
transmission.l The CPRI1 port on the MRFU is connected to the WBBPb or WBBPd for UMTS data
transmission.l The configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs are as follows:
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-31
– The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station configured with WBBPbs areshown in Figure 3-28 and listed in Table 3-20 and Table 3-21.
Figure 3-28 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (1)
Table 3-20 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (1)
MRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
Numberof theCPRIPort ontheGTMU
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
Numberof theWBBPbin Slot3
CPRI0 - CPRI1 - CPRI2 -
Numberof theWBBPbin Slot2
- CPRI0 - CPRI1 - CPRI2
– The CPRI port configuration principles in a base station configured with WBBPds are
shown in Figure 3-29 and listed in Table 3-21.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-29 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (2)
Table 3-21 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs (2)
MRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
Numberof theCPRIPort ontheGTMU
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
Numberof theWBBPdin Slot3
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
3.5.6 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theGSM+LTE Base Station
When a base station works in GSM+LTE mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the MRFUs, andthe boards configured in the BBU are the GTMU, UBRI, LMPT, and LBBP.
Basic CPRI Port Connection Principlesl The MRFUs can work in the dual-star topology rather than chain topology.l When the MRFU works in the dual-star topology, the signals in the same mode cannot be
transmitted over two CPRI links.l MRFUs cannot be connected to RRUs.
Figure 3-30 shows the CPRI port connection principles for the MRFUs working in GSM+LTEmode.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-33
Figure 3-30 CPRI port connection principles
CPRI Port Configuration Principles
In co-cabinet mode, the DRFUs/GRFUs and LRFUs use the configuration principles for theCPRI ports on RFUs in GSM and LTE modes respectively.
In co-module mode, the CPRI port configuration principles are as follows:
l The CPRI0 port on the MRFU is connected to the GTMU or UBRI for GSM datatransmission.
l The CPRI1 port on the MRFU is connected to the LBBP for LTE data transmission.
The CPRI port configuration principles are shown in Figure 3-31 and listed in Table 3-22.
Figure 3-31 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs
Table 3-22 Configuration principles for the CPRI ports on the MRFUs
MRFUSlotNumber
0 1 2 3 4 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Numberof theCPRIPort ontheGTMU
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
Numberof theCPRIPort onthe LBBPin Slot 3
CPRI0 CPRI1 CPRI2 CPRI3 CPRI4 CPRI5
3.5.7 Configuration Principles for the CPRI Ports on the RFU in theUMTS+LTE Base Station
When a base station works in UMTS+LTE mode, the RFUs in the cabinet are the WRFUs andLRFUs, and the boards configured in the BBU are the WMPT, WBBP, LMPT, and LBBP.
CPRI Port Configuration Principles
The UMTS+LTE base station works in co-cabinet mode.
l The WRFUs use the configuration principles for the CPRI ports on RFUs in UMTS mode.
l The LRFUs use the configuration principles for the CPRI ports on RFUs in LTE mode.
The CPRI port connection principles in UMTS+LTE mode are shown in Figure 3-32 and listedin Table 3-23.
Figure 3-32 CPRI port configuration principles
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-35
Table 3-23 CPRI port configuration principles
MRFUSlotNumber
0 - 2 - 4 -
LRFUSlotNumber
- 1 - 3 - 5
Numberof theCPRIPort ontheWBBP inSlot 3
CPRI0 - CPRI2 - CPRI4 -
Numberof theCPRIPort onthe LBBPin Slot 2
- CPRI1 - CPRI3 - CPRI5
3.6 BTS3900 Monitoring SystemThe BTS3900 monitoring system monitors all boards and components in the cabinet. If anyboard or component is faulty, an alarm is reported automatically. The alarm signals are collectedboth inside and outside the cabinet by the UPEU, UEIU, or EMU, so that the entire site can bemonitored.
3.6.1 BBU Monitoring Port
3.6.2 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is managed by the monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Amonitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. It collects the alarms of allcomponents and reports the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.
3.6.3 Customized Alarm InputsWhen an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to theBBU.
3.6.1 BBU Monitoring PortThe BBU houses the UPEU and UEIU for monitoring. Each board has two Boolean input portsand two RS485 input ports, and each Boolean input port receives four Boolean inputs. Figure3-33 shows the slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-33 Slot assignment for the UPEU and UEIU
Table 3-24 lists the ports on the UPEU and UEIU.
Table 3-24 Ports on the UPEU and UEIU
Slot Board Port Connector Quantity Description
Slot19 UPEU EXT-ALM0 RJ-45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 8 to 11
EXT-ALM1 RJ-45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 12 to15
MON0 RJ-45connector
1 Port forRS485 input0
MON1 RJ-45connector
1 Port forRS485 input1
Slot18 UEIU(optional)
EXT-ALM0 RJ-45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1 RJ-45connector
1 Port forBooleaninputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ-45connector
1 Port forRS485 input0
MON1 RJ-45connector
1 Port forRS485 input1
3.6.2 Monitoring Principles of the CabinetThe BTS3900 cabinet is managed by the monitoring boards, such as the FMU and PMU. Amonitoring board is connected to the MON port on the BBU. It collects the alarms of allcomponents and reports the alarms to the BBU by using the RS485 serial bus.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-37
l For details about the monitoring ports on the FMU, see 4.8 Fan Box. The FMU is configuredin the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC), BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC), and BTS3900 cabinet(AC). For details about the position of the FMU in the cabinet, see 3.1.1 ModuleConfigurations in the Cabinet and 4.8 Fan Box.
l For details about the monitoring ports on the PMU, see 4.12.2 PMU. The PMU isconfigured in the BTS3900 cabinet (AC). For details about the position of the PMU in thecabinet, see 3.1.1 Module Configurations in the Cabinet.
This document describes monitoring principles of two BTS3900 cabinets. If cabinet 1 is notconfigured, the monitoring cables connected to the cabinet are not required.
Figure 3-34 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC)
Figure 3-35 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V DC)
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-36 Monitoring system for the BTS3900 cabinet (AC)
NOTE
For details about how to monitor the EMU, see the section Customized Alarm Inputs.
3.6.3 Customized Alarm InputsWhen an alarm is generated by the customized equipment, the alarm must be reported to theBBU.
Customized alarms are reported to the BBU by any of the following methods:l The alarms are collected by the UPEU or UEIU in the BBU.l The alarms are collected by the EMU.
For details about the configuration of the customized alarms, see the related initial configurationguide.
Monitoring Board Configuration
The configuration of the monitoring boards in the BTS3900 depends on the number ofcustomized alarms, as listed in Table 3-25.
Table 3-25 Configuration of monitoring boards in the BTS3900
Cabinet Type Number of Dry ContactAlarm Inputs
Monitoring Board
-48 V DC cabinet orAC cabinet
None UPEU
1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU
17 to 32 UPEU+UEIU+EMU
+24 V DC cabinet None UPEU
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-39
Cabinet Type Number of Dry ContactAlarm Inputs
Monitoring Board
1 to 16 UPEU+UEIU+EMU
17 to 32
NOTE
l If backup power is required for the BBU, two UPEUs rather than UPEU+UEIU are configured.
l If three BTS3900 cabinets are configured, only one UEIU is required to monitor both RS485 and drycontact alarms.
l Analog values can be monitored only by the EMU.
l The EMU with sensors can be configured according to site requirements.
Customized Alarms Collected by the UPEU or UEIU
Each UPEU or UEIU in the BBU supports eight Boolean alarm inputs. A maximum of twoUPEUs or UPEU+UEIU can be configured for the BBU to receive 16 Boolean alarm inputs.This method can be used for the configuration of fewer than 16 customized alarm inputs. Themethod to collect customized alarms by using the UPEU or UEIU is shown in Figure 3-37.
Figure 3-37 Customized alarms collected by the UPEU or UEIU
Customized Alarms Collected by the EMU
If there are more than 16 Boolean alarm inputs, the EMU can be configured for the BTS3900.Each EMU supports 32 Boolean alarm inputs and two RS485 signal inputs, the cable connectionsare shown in Figure 3-38.
l The cable connection of the EMU in the BTS3900 cabinet (-48 V DC) and BTS3900 cabinet(+24 V DC): The EMU is connected to the MON1 port on the UPEU in the BBU.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l The cable connection of the EMU in the BTS3900 cabinet (AC): The EMU is connectedto the right RS232/RS422 port on the PMU in the AC/DC power equipment.
Figure 3-38 Customized alarms collected by the EMU
3.7 RF ConfigurationsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, LRFUs, or MRFUs.
3.7.1 RFU ConfigurationsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be MRFUs, DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, or LRFUs.
3.7.2 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM Only ModeWhen a base station works in GSM only mode, the DRFU or GRFU slot assignment in a cabinetmust comply with specific principles.
3.7.3 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in UMTS Only ModeWhen a base station works in UMTS only mode, the WRFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
3.7.4 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in LTE Only ModeWhen a base station works in LTE only mode, the LRFU or MRFU slot assignment in a cabinetmust comply with specific principles.
3.7.5 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM+UMTS ModeWhen a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
3.7.6 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in GSM+LTE ModeWhen a base station works in GSM+LTE mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
3.7.7 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working in UMTS+LTE Mode
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-41
When a base station works in UMTS+LTE mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
3.7.1 RFU ConfigurationsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be MRFUs, DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, or LRFUs.
Table 3-26 describes RFU configurations.
Table 3-26 RFU configurations
Mode FrequencyBand
SupportedRFU
MaximumNumber ofSupportedCarriers
Number of TXand RXChannels
GSM only (GO) EGSM 900MHz
DRFU/GRFU/MRFU V1/MRFU V2
l 2 carriers(DRFU)
l 6 carriers(GRFU)
l 6 carriers(MRFU V1/MRFU V2)
l 2T2R(DRFU)
l 1T2R(GRFU)
l 1T2R(MRFU V1/MRFU V2)
PGSM 900MHz
DRFU/GRFU/MRFU V1/MRFU V2
GSM 1800 MHz DRFU/GRFU/MRFU V1/MRFU V2
GSM 1900 MHz GRFU/MRFUV1
UMTS only(UO)
850 MHz WRFU l 2 or 4carriers(WRFU)
l 4 carriers(MRFU V1/MRFU V2)
l 1T2R(WRFU)
l 1T2R(MRFU V1/MRFU V2)
900 MHz MRFU V1/MRFU V2
2100 MHz WRFU
LTE only (LO) AWS LRFU l 1 carrier(LRFU)
l 1 carrier(MRFU V2)
l 2T2R(LRFU)
l 1T2R(MRFU)
2600 MHz
900 MHz MRFU V2
1800 MHz
GSM+UMTS(GU)
- MRFU V1/MRFU V2
A base stationworking inGSM+UMTSmode supports amaximum of sixcarriers, and amaximum oftwo carriers aresupported by theUMTS side.
1T2R
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Mode FrequencyBand
SupportedRFU
MaximumNumber ofSupportedCarriers
Number of TXand RXChannels
GSM+LTE(GL)
- MRFU V1/MRFU V2
A base stationworking inGSM+LTEmode supports amaximum of sixcarriers, and onecarrier issupported by theLTE side.
1T2R
UMTS+LTE(UL)
- WRFU/LRFU l 2 or 4carriers(WRFU)
l 1 carrier(LRFU)
l 1T2R(WRFU)
l 2T2R(LRFU)
3.7.2 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inGSM Only Mode
When a base station works in GSM only mode, the DRFU or GRFU slot assignment in a cabinetmust comply with specific principles.
Site Type DescriptionThe configuration principles for a dual-band GSM base station are similar. For example, theconfiguration principles for a dual-band base station (900 MHz and 1800 MHz) are similar tothe principles for a dual-band (850 MHz and 1800 MHz) base station. The following descriptionis based on a dual-band base station (900 MHz and 1800 MHz). & is used to separate 900 MHzband from 1800 MHz band in a dual-band base station. The GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4 configurationindicates a base station works in dual-band mode on the GSM side. S2/2/2(1G+1G+1G) indicatesthat a base station in S2/2/2 configuration is configured with one GRFU in each sector. GRFUis represented by G.
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in GSM only mode are numbered from G1 in a
numerical order, for example G1 and G2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from G1to G6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from G7 to G12.
l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: A single-band base station supporting not more than three sectors for the band,with the configuration of GRFUs or DRFUs in a single RFC
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-43
Table 3-27 describes the slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs when not more than three single-band sectors are configured in a single RFC. If more than two GRFUs or DRFUs are configuredfor G1, the GRFU or DRFU that is not inserted can be preferentially positioned in slot 2 incabinet 1. If more than two GRFUs or DRFUs are configured for G2, the GRFU or DRFU thatis not inserted can be preferentially positioned in slot 4 in cabinet 1. If more than two GRFUsor DRFUs are configured for G3, the GRFU or DRFU that is not inserted can be preferentiallypositioned in slot 3 in cabinet 1.
Table 3-27 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs
Sector Number G1 G2 G3
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
Figure 3-39 GSM S4/4/4 (1G+1G+1G)
Figure 3-40 GSM S10/10/8 (2G+2G+2G)
If more than three single-band sectors are configured in a single RFC, GRFUs or DRFUs arepositioned in the slots from left to right in the RFC.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Scenario 2: A dual-band base station supporting not more than three sectors for the band,with the configuration of GRFUs or DRFUs
Table 3-28 describes the slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs when not more than three sectorsare configured for each band in a single RFC.
Table 3-28 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs
SectorNumber
G1 G2 G3 G7 G8 G9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5
Figure 3-41 GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4 (1G+1G+1G & 1G+1G+1G)
Scenario 2: A dual-band base station supporting not more than three sectors for each band,with the configuration of GRFUs or DRFUs in two RFCs
If not more than three sectors are configured for each band, cabinet 1 is used for the band forwhich more GRFUs or DRFUs are configured. Cabinet 2 is used for the other band. If the samenumber of GRFUs or DRFUs are configured for each band, cabinet 1 is preferentially used for900 MHz.
Table 3-29 Slot assignment for GRFUs or DRFUs
SectorNumber
G1 G2 G3 G7 G8 G9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 1 or 2 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-45
Figure 3-42 GSM S8/8/8 & S8/8/8 (2G+2G+2G & 2G+2G+2G)
If more than two GRFUs or DRFUs are configured for G1 or G7, the GRFU or DRFU that isnot inserted can be preferentially positioned in slot in G2 or G8. If more than two GRFUs orDRFUs are configured for G2 or G8, the GRFU or DRFU that is not inserted can be preferentiallypositioned in the slot in G1 or G7 and then in the slot in G3 or G9 when the slot is insufficient.If more than two GRFUs or DRFUs are configured for G3 or G9, the GRFU or DRFU that isnot inserted can be preferentially positioned in slot in G2 or G8.
3.7.3 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inUMTS Only Mode
When a base station works in UMTS only mode, the WRFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in UMTS only mode are numbered from U1 in a
numerical order, for example U1 and U2.l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.
A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: Three WRFUs for three sectors
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
If three WRFUs are configured for three sectors, the WRFUs are preferentially positioned inslots 0, 2, and 4 in cabinet 1.
Figure 3-43 UMTS S1/1/1 (1W+1W+1W)
Scenario 1: Six WRFUs for three sectors
If six WRFUs are configured for three sectors, the WRFUs are positioned in the slots from leftto right in cabinet 1.
Figure 3-44 UMTS S4/4/4 (2W+2W+2W)
3.7.4 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inLTE Only Mode
When a base station works in LTE only mode, the LRFU or MRFU slot assignment in a cabinetmust comply with specific principles.
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-47
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in LTE only mode are numbered from L1 in a
numerical order, for example L1 and L2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from L1 toL6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from L7 to L12.
l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: A single-band base station, with the configuration of LFRUs or MRFUs
Three single-band sectorsl When LRFUs are configured, they are preferentially positioned in the slots in cabinet 1.
That is, the LRFU configured for L1 is preferentially positioned in slot 0 and then slot 1 ifslot 0 is occupied. The LRFU configured for L2 is preferentially positioned in slot 2 andthen slot 3 if slot 2 is occupied. The LRFU configured for L3 is preferentially positionedin slot 4 and then slot 5 if slot 4 is occupied.
l When MRFUs are configured, they are preferentially positioned in the slots in cabinet 1.That is, the MRFU configured for L1 is preferentially positioned in slot 0 and then slot 1if slot 0 is occupied. The MRFU configured for L2 is preferentially positioned in slot 2 andthen slot 3 if slot 2 is occupied. The MRFU configured for L3 is preferentially positionedin slot 4 and then slot 5 if slot 4 is occupied.
Table 3-30 describes the RFU slot assignment.
Table 3-30 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a single-band base station
Sector Number L1 L2 L3
LRFU Slot 0 or 1 in cabinet1
Slot 2 or 3 in cabinet1
Slot 4 or 5 in cabinet1
MRFU Slot 0 or 1 in cabinet1
Slot 2 or 3 in cabinet1
Slot 4 or 5 in cabinet1
Figure 3-45 LRFU 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-46 LRFU 4T4R 3 x 20 MHz
If more than three single-band sectors are configured and LRFUs are configured, the LRFUs arepreferentially positioned in the slots from left to right in cabinet 1. If MRFUs are configured,they are preferentially positioned in the slots from left to right in cabinet 1. After all the slots incabinet 1 are occupied, MRFUs can be positioned in the slots from left to right in cabinet 2.
Scenario 2: A dual-band base station, with the configuration of MRFUs and LFRUs
If three sectors are configured for each band, LRFUs are preferentially positioned in the slots incabinet 2. That is, the LRFU configured for L1 is preferentially positioned in slot 0 and then slot1 if slot 0 is occupied. The LRFU configured for L2 is preferentially positioned in slot 2 andthen slot 3 if slot 2 is occupied. The LRFU configured for L3 is preferentially positioned in slot4 and then slot 5 if slot 4 is occupied. MRFUs are preferentially positioned in the slots in cabinet1. The MRFU configured for L1 is preferentially positioned in slot 0 and then slot 1 if slot 0 isoccupied. The MRFU configured for L2 is preferentially positioned in slot 2 and then slot 3 ifslot 2 is occupied. The MRFU configured for L3 is preferentially positioned in slot 4 and thenslot 5 if slot 4 is occupied. Table 3-31 describes the RFU slot assignment.
Table 3-31 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a dual-band base station
SectorNumber
L1 L2 L3 L7 L8 L9
LRFU - - - Slot 0 or 1in cabinet2
Slot 2 or 3in cabinet2
Slot 4 or 5in cabinet2
MRFU Slot 0 or 1in cabinet1
Slot 2 or 3in cabinet1
Slot 4 or 5in cabinet1
- - -
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-49
Figure 3-47 LRFU 3 x 20 MHz+MRFU 3 x 20 MHz
If more than three sectors are configured for each band, LRFUs are preferentially positioned inthe slots from left to right in cabinet 2, and MRFUs are preferentially positioned in the slots fromleft to right in cabinet 1. If more than six MRFUs are configured, MRFUs can be positioned inthe slots from left to right in cabinet 2 after all the slots in cabinet 1 are occupied. Then, LRFUsare positioned to the right of the MRFUs.
3.7.5 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inGSM+UMTS Mode
When a base station works in GSM+UMTS mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
Precautions for RFU Slot Assignmentl The 3900 series macro base station of SRAN5.0 supports the configurations of MRFUs,
hybrid configurations of GRFUs and MRFUs, and hybrid configurations of GRFUs andWRFUs. Hybrid configurations are used only for capacity expansion. The base station withthe hybrid configurations of GRFUs and MRFUs does not support MIMO.
l In a base station, the RFUs in the same frequency band must be of the same type. Forexample, in a GSM+UMTS base station with the configuration of GSM 900M S4/4/4/4+UMTS 900M S1/1/1, four GSM sectors and three UMTS sectors are configured. In thiscase, MRFUs rather than GRFUs or DRFUs must be configured for the GSM sectors.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Site Type DescriptionThe configuration principles for a dual-band GSM base station are similar. For example, theconfiguration principles for a dual-band base station (900 MHz and 1800 MHz) are similar tothe principles for a dual-band (850 MHz and 1800 MHz) base station. The following descriptionis based on a dual-band base station (900 MHz and 1800 MHz). & is used to separate 900 MHzband from 1800 MHz band in a dual-band base station. The GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4+UMTSS1/1/1 configuration indicates that a dual-mode base station works in dual-band mode on theGSM side. S2/2/2 (1G+1G+1G) indicates that a base station in S2/2/2 configuration is configuredwith one GRFU in each sector. GRFU is represented by G, DRFU is represented by D, WRFUis represented by W, and MRFU is represented by M.
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in GSM only mode are numbered from G1 in a
numerical order, for example G1 and G2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from G1to G6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from G7 to G12.
l The sectors in a base station working in UMTS only mode are numbered from U1 in anumerical order, for example U1 and U2.
l The sectors in a multi-mode base station are numbered from M1 in a numerical order, forexample M1 and M2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from M1 to M6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from M7 to M12.
l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: A dual-mode base station working in single-band mode on the GSM side andsupporting not more than three sectors for the band, with the configuration of GRFUs (orDRFUs) and WRFUs
If not more than three GSM sectors are configured , GRFUs or DRFUs are preferentiallypositioned in slots 0, 2, and 4 in cabinet 1. By default, WRFUs are positioned in slots 1, 3, and5 in cabinet 1.
Table 3-32 Slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and WRFUs
SectorNumber
G1 G2 G3 U1 U2 U3
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5
Cabinet 2 - - - - - -
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-51
Figure 3-48 GSM 900M S4/4/4+UMTS 1800M S1/1/1
Scenario 2: A dual-mode base station working in dual-band mode on the GSM side andsupporting not more than three sectors for each band, with the configuration of GRFUs(or DRFUs) and WRFUs
If a dual-mode base station works in dual-band mode on the GSM side and not more than sixGSM GRFUs or DRFUs are configured, the GRFUs or DRFUs are evenly positioned in the slotsin cabinet 1. By default, WRFUs are positioned in slots 1, 3, and 5 in cabinet 2.
Table 3-33 Slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and WRFUs
SectorNumber
G1 G2 G3 G7 G8 G9 U1 U2 U3
Cabinet 1
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 - - -
Cabinet 2
- - - - - - Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-49 GSM S4/4/4 & S4/4/4+UMTS 1800M S1/1/1
Scenario 3: A dual-mode base station working in dual-band mode and supporting not morethan three sectors for each band, with the configuration of MRFUs
A base station supports not more than three sectors for each band and is configured with MRFUsin dual-band mode. Low-frequency MRFUs are positioned in slots 0, 2, and 4 in cabinet 1, andhigh-frequency MRFUs are positioned in slots 1, 3, and 5 in cabinet 1.
Table 3-34 RFU slot assignment for MRFUs
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 M7 M8 M9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5
Cabinet 2 - - - - - -
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-53
Figure 3-50 GSM S4/2/2 & S4/4/4+UMTS 900M S1/1/1
Scenario 4: A dual-mode base station working in dual-band mode and supporting not morethan three sectors for each band, with the configuration of GRFUs (or DRFUs) and MRFUs
RFUs for each band are positioned separately. MRFUs are positioned in the slots in cabinet 1,and GRFUs (or DRFUs) are positioned in the slots in cabinet 2.
Table 3-35 RFU slot assignment for GRFUs (or DRFUs) and MRFUs
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 G7 G8 G9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-51 GSM S4/4/4 & S8/8/8+UMTS 900M S2/2/2 (900M: 2M+2M+2M, 1800M: 2G+2G+2G)
Scenario 5: A dual-mode base station supporting not more than three sectors for eachband, with the configuration of MRFUs, GRFUs (or DRFUs), and WRFUs
A dual-mode base station supports not more than three sectors for each band and is configuredwith MRFUs, GRFUs (or DRFUs), and WRFUs. MRFUs and WRFUs are preferentiallypositioned in the slots in cabinet 1. GRFUs (or DRFUs) are preferentially positioned in the slotsin cabinet 2.
Table 3-36 RFU slot assignment for MRFUs, GRFUs (or DRFUs), and WRFUs
SectorNumber
M1 U1 M2 U2 M3 U3 G1 G2 G3
Cabinet 1
Slot 0 Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 - - -
Cabinet 2
- - - - - - Slot 0or 1
Slot 2or 3
Slot 4or 5
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-55
Figure 3-52 3MRFU+6GRFU+3WRFU
3.7.6 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inGSM+LTE Mode
When a base station works in GSM+LTE mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
Precautions for RFU Slot Assignmentl The 3900 series macro base station of SRAN5.0 supports the configurations of MRFUs,
hybrid configurations of GRFUs and MRFUs, hybrid configurations of GRFUs and LRFUs,and hybrid configurations of MRFUs and LRFUs. Hybrid configurations are used only forcapacity expansion. The base station with the hybrid configurations of GRFUs and MRFUsdoes not support MIMO.
l In a base station, the RFUs in the same frequency band must be of the same type.
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in GSM only mode are numbered from G1 in a
numerical order, for example G1 and G2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from G1to G6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from G7 to G12.
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l The sectors in a base station working in LTE only mode are numbered from L1 in anumerical order, for example L1 and L2.
l The sectors in a multi-mode base station are numbered from M1 in a numerical order, forexample M1 and M2. Low-frequency sectors are numbered from M1 to M6, and high-frequency sectors are numbered from M7 to M12.
l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: A dual-band base station, with the configuration of MRFUs for each band
Table 3-37 Slot assignment for MRFUs in a dual-band base station
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 M7 M8 M9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
Figure 3-53 MRFU900M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz+MRFU1800M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-57
Scenario 2: A dual-band base station, with the configuration of MRFUs and GRFUs
Table 3-38 Slot assignment for MRFUs and GRFUs in a dual-band base station
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 G7 G8 G9
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
Figure 3-54 MRFU900M 2T2R 3 x 20 MHz+6GRFU1800M
Scenario 3: A dual-band base station, with the configuration of MRFUs and LRFUs
Table 3-39 Slot assignment for MRFUs and LRFUs in a dual-band base station
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 L1 L2 L3
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-55 3 x 20 MHz 2T2R
Scenario 4: A dual-band base station, with the configuration of DRFUs (or GRFUs) andLRFUs
Table 3-40 Slot assignment for DRFUs (or GRFUs) and LRFUs in a dual-band base station
SectorNumber
G1 G2 G3 L1 L2 L3
Cabinet 1 Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5 - - -
Cabinet 2 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-59
Figure 3-56 3GRFU+LRFU 3 x 20 MHz
Scenario 5: A tri-band base station, with the configuration of MRFUs, GRFUs, and LRFUs
Table 3-41 Slot assignment for MRFUs, GRFUs, and LRFUs in a tri-band base station
SectorNumber
M1 M2 M3 G7 G8 G9 L1 L2 L3
Cabinet 1
Slot 0or 1
Slot 2or 3
Slot 4or 5
- - - - - -
Cabinet 2
- - - Slot 0 Slot 2 Slot 4 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 3-57 MRFU900M 3 x 20 MHz+3GRFU1800M+LRFU 3 x 20 MHz
3.7.7 Slot Assignment for the RFUs in a Base Station Working inUMTS+LTE Mode
When a base station works in UMTS+LTE mode, the RFU slot assignment in a cabinet mustcomply with specific principles.
Numbering Schemel The sectors in a base station working in UMTS only mode are numbered from U1 in a
numerical order, for example U1 and U2.l The sectors in a base station working in LTE only mode are numbered from L1 in a
numerical order, for example L1 and L2.l The slots are numbered from 0 in a numerical order, for example slot 0, slot 1, and slot 2.
A slot can be identified through cabinet number+slot number, for example, slot 1 in cabinet1 (primary RFC).
Principles for RFU Slot AssignmentScenario 1: A dual-mode base station, with the configuration of WRFUs and LRFUs
BTS3900Hardware Description 3 BTS3900 Hardware Configuration
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
3-61
Table 3-42 Slot assignment for WRFUs and LRFUs
SectorNumber
L1 L2 L3 U1 U2 U3
Cabinet 1 - - - Slot 0 or 1 Slot 2 or 3 Slot 4 or 5
Cabinet 2 Slot 1 Slot 3 Slot 5 - - -
Figure 3-58 UMTS S1/1/1+LTE 3 x 20 MHz
3 BTS3900 Hardware ConfigurationBTS3900
Hardware Description
3-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
4 BTS3900 Components
About This Chapter
This describes the components of the BTS3900, which are the BBU3900, RFUs, DCDU-01,FAN unit, DC/DC power system, AC/DC power system and optional modules. The AC/DCpower system is configured in the BTS3900 cabinet (220 V); the DC/DC power system isconfigured in the BTS3900 cabinet (+24 V).
4.1 BBU3900 EquipmentThis describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
4.2 GRFUThe GSM Radio Frequency Unit (GRFU) is designed on the basis of multi-transceivertechnology. One GRFU supports 6 carriers.
4.3 DRFUThe Double Radio Frequency Unit (DRFU) is a dual-density RF unit. A DRFU processes twocarriers.
4.4 WRFUOne WCDMA Radio Filter Unit (WRFU) supports 2 carriers or 4 carriers.
4.5 MRFUOne Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) supports a maximum of six carriers.
4.6 LRFULTE Radio Frequency Units (LRFUs) work in Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode.
4.7 DCDU-01The Direct Current Distribution Unit-01 (DCDU-01) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet.
4.8 Fan BoxA fan box consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.
4.9 GATMThe GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.
4.10 ELU
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-1
The Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type information to the fan box.
4.11 Power Equipment (DC/DC)The power equipment (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power.
4.12 Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
4.1 BBU3900 EquipmentThis describes the BBU3900 equipment in terms of the appearance, boards and their panels,module, LEDs, ports, and engineering specifications.
The BBU3900 has the following functions:
l Provides ports for communication between the base station and the BSC/RNCl Provides CPRI ports for the communication with the RF modulesl Provides USB ports, which facilitates automatic base station upgrade by allowing a USB
disk to be used for software installation and data configurationl Provides an OM channel between the base station and the LMT or the M2000l Processes uplink and downlink datal Manages the entire dual-mode system in terms of OM and signaling processingl Provides the system clock
4.1.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
4.1.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
4.1.1 Exterior of the BBU3900The BBU3900, which has a case structure, is 19 inches wide and 2 U high.
The dimensions (W x D x H) of the BBU3900 are 442 mm x 310 mm x 86 mm. Figure 4-1shows the BBU3900.
Figure 4-1 BBU3900
The Electronic Serial Number (ESN) is unique to a network element (NE) for identification, andis used during the commissioning of the base station.l If there is a label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on a label and the mounting
ears of the BBU. Figure 4-2 shows the position of the ESN.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-3
Figure 4-2 The position of the ESN (1)
l If there is no label on the FAN unit of the BBU, the ESN is printed on the mounting earsof the BBU. Figure 4-3 shows the position of the ESN.
Figure 4-3 The position of the ESN (2)
4.1.2 Boards and Module of the BBU3900This describes the boards and module of the BBU3900 in terms of their configuration principles,functions, ports, LEDs, and DIP switches.
GTMUThe GSM Transmission & Timing & Management Unit for BBU (GTMU) is the basictransmission and control function entity of the BBU. It provides the reference clock, maintenanceport, and external alarm collection port, monitors the power supply, and controls and managesthe entire base station.
PanelThe GTMU is classified into two types: GTMU and GTMUb. Figure 4-4 and Figure 4-5 showthe panels of the GTMU and GTMUb.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 4-4 GTMU panel
Figure 4-5 GTMUb panel
NOTEThe GTMU hereinafter mentioned in this document is the first type.
Functions
The GTMU and GTMUb have the following functions:
l Controls and manages the base station
l Supports fault management system, configuration management system, performancemanagement system, and security management system
l Monitors the fans and power modules
l Provides and manages the clock source of the base station in centralized mode
l Provides the clock output for test
l Provides the FE port for maintenance on the OM system
l Supports transmission through four E1s and two FEs
l Provides CPRI ports for communication between the BBU and the RFUs
l The GTMUb supports interconnected BBUs.
l Four IDX2 ports on the backplane of the GTMUb can achieve the function of basebandresource pool backup.
LEDs
Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the GTMU.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-5
Table 4-1 LEDs on the GTMU
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON The board is faulty.
OFF There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is running properly.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board is being tested.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
Software is being loaded to theboard.
ALM Red ON An alarm is generated,indicating a running fault.
OFF The board is running properly.
ACT Green ON The board is in the active state.
OFF The board is in the standby state.
Besides the preceding three LEDs, there are LEDs indicating the connection status of the FEoptical port, FE electrical port, CPRI port and commissioning port. Each of the LEDs ispositioned near the relevant port without any label on the panel of the board. Table 4-2 describesthe LEDs and their status.
Table 4-2 LEDs and their status
LED Color Status Description
LIU0 to LIU3 Green ON The link is in the idlestate.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
An E1/T1 remotealarm is generated.
OFF The link isfunctional.
CPRI0 to CPRI5 Green ON The CPRI link isfunctional.
Red ON The optical modulefails to receivesignals.
ETH Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
LED Color Status Description
OFF No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT LEDon the right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
FE0 Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
OFF No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT LEDon the right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
FE1(GTMUb) Green (LINK LEDon the left)
ON The connection is setup successfully.
OFF No connection is setup.
Green (ACT LED onthe right)
Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
OFF No data is beingtransmitted.
M_S (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.
EXT (GTMUb) - - This is the LED of thereserved port.
PortsTable 4-3 describes the ports on the GTMU.
Table 4-3 Ports on the GTMU
Label Connector Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female Data transmission port interconnected to the RFU.It supports the input and output of optical andelectrical transmission signals
EXT (GTMUb) SFP female Obligate
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-7
Label Connector Description
ETH RJ-45 connector Local maintenance and debugging port
FE0 RJ-45 connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough FE cables to transmit networkinformation
FE1 DLC connector Connected to the routers in the equipment roomthrough optical cables to transmit networkinformation
USB USB connector Used for automatic software upgrade through theUSB disk
TST USB connector Provides a reference clock for the tester
E1/T1 DB26 femaleconnector
Used for four E1/T1 inputs and outputs betweenthe GTMU and the UELP or between BSCs
The RST button on the panel of the GTMU is used for resetting the board.
DIP SwitchesOn the GTMU, there are five DIP switches, each of which has four bits. DIP switches S1 andS2 must be set together. The functions of the five DIP switches are as follows:
l S1 is used to select the E1 resistance. Table 4-4 provides details on the DIP switch.l S2 is used to select the grounding mode of E1/T1 cables. Table 4-5 provides details on the
DIP switch.l S3 is reserved.l S4 is used to select the E1 bypass. Table 4-6 provides details on the DIP switch.l S5 is used for timeslot settings when the E1 bypass is selected. Table 4-7 provides details
on the DIP switch.
Table 4-4 Details of the DIP Switch S1
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S1 ON ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to75 ohm.
OFF ON OFF OFF The E1 resistance is set to120 ohm.
ON OFF OFF OFF The T1 resistance is set to100 ohm.
Others Unavailable
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
Bits 3 and 4 of S1 should be kept as out-of-factory state, without any manual setting on site. The out-of-factory state should be OFF. If the bits are ON, set them to OFF.
Table 4-5 Details of the DIP Switch S2
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S2 OFF OFF OFF OFF By default, all the DIPbits of S2 are set to OFFin all the modes.
ON ON ON ON When the four E1 RXlinks in 75 ohm haveerrors, all the bits of S2must be set to ON torectify the faults on theE1 links.
Others Unavailable
Table 4-6 Details of the DIP Switch S4
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S4 ON ON ON ON Supporting E1 bypass
OFF OFF OFF OFF Not supporting E1bypass
Others Unavailable
Table 4-7 Details of the DIP Switch S5
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
S5 ON ON ON ON Not supporting E1bypass
OFF ON ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-1 cascadedbase stations
ON OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-2 cascadedbase stations
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-9
DIPSwitch
Bit Status Description
1 2 3 4
OFF OFF ON OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-3 cascadedbase stations
ON ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-4 cascadedbase stations
OFF ON OFF OFF Supporting E1 bypassof level-5 cascadedbase stations
NOTE
The E1 bypass function is not supported in this version. All the bits of S4 should be set to OFF, and all thebits of S5 should be set to ON.
WMPTThe WCDMA Main Processes and Transmission unit (WMPT) of the BBU3900 processes thesignals and manages the resources for other boards.
PanelFigure 4-6 shows the panel of the WMPT.
Figure 4-6 Panel of the WMPT
FunctionsThe WMPT has the following functions:
l Provides Operation and Maintenance (OM) functions such as configuration management,equipment management, performance monitoring, signaling processing, and active/standby switchover and provides OM channels connected to the OMC (LMT or M2000)
l Provides the reference clockl Processes signaling and manages resources for other boards in the BBU3900l Provides USB ports, one of which facilitates automatic base station upgraded when a USB
disk is inserted during software installation and data configurationl Provides four E1s/T1s which support ATM and IP protocolsl Provides one FE electrical port and one FE optical port which support the IP protocol
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
LEDsTable 4-8 describes the LEDs on the WMPT panel.
Table 4-8 LEDs on the WMPT panel
Label Color Status Meaning
RUN Green ON The power input isavailable, but theboard is faulty.
OFF The power supply isunavailable.
1s ON and 1s OFF The board in normalconfiguration isrunning properly.
0.125s ON and0.125s OFF
The software is beingloaded to the board,or the board is not inuse.
ALM Red OFF No alarm isgenerated.
ON The board has alarmson hardware.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is instandby mode.
In addition to the previous three LEDs, the WMPT has another six LEDs indicating theconnection status of the FE optical port, FE electrical port, and the commissioning Ethernet port.The six LEDs have no silk screen and are on both sides of each of the three ports. Figure 4-7shows the LEDs beside the three ports.
Figure 4-7 LEDs beside the three ports on the WMPT
Table 4-9 describes the LEDs and their status.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-11
Table 4-9 LEDs and their status
LED Color Status Meaning
LEDs beside the FE1optical port
Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Green (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
LEDs beside the FE0electrical port
Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
ETH Green (LINK) ON The connections arefunctional.
OFF The connections arefaulty.
Yellow (ACT) Blinking Data transmission isongoing.
OFF No data transmissionis ongoing.
Ports
Table 4-10 describes the ports on the WMPT panel.
Table 4-10 Ports on the WMPT panel
Label Connector Type Description
E1/T1 DB26 connector E1/T1 port
FE0 RJ45 connector FE electrical port
FE1 SFP connector FE optical port
GPS SMA connector Obligate
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Label Connector Type Description
ETH RJ45 connector Commissioning Ethernetport
USB USB connector USB loading port
TST USB connector USB testing port
RST - Resetting the BBU
DIP Switches
The WMPT has two DIP switches: SW1 for setting the E1/T1 working mode and SW2 for settingthe protection grounding for the E1/T1 cables receiving 4-way signals. Figure 4-8 shows theDIP switches on the WMPT.
Figure 4-8 DIP switches on the WMPT
Table 4-11 and Table 4-12 describe the settings of SW1 and SW2.
Table 4-11 Settings of SW1
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW1 ON ON OFF OFF T1 Mode
OFF OFF ON ON The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-13
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
Table 4-12 Settings of SW2
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
CAUTIONAll the DIP bits of SW2 are set to OFF by default. When four E1 links are faulty, you shouldset all the DIP bits of SW2 to ON so that the faults are rectified.
LMPT
The LTE Main Processing & Transmission unit (LMPT) manages the entire eNodeB system interms of OM and signaling processing and provides the clock for the BBU3900.
Panel
Figure 4-9 shows the LMPT.
Figure 4-9 LMPT
TX
SFP 0
RX TX
SFP 1
RX
USB TST ETH FE/GE0 FE/GE1GPSRST
RUNALMACT
LMPT
LMPTb
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Functions
The LMPT has the following functions:
l Enabling configuration management, device management, performance monitoring,signaling processing, and radio source management
l Enabling control for the boards in the systeml Providing the system clockl Enabling signal exchange between the eNodeB and MME/S-GW
LEDs
There are three LEDs on the panel of the LMPT. Table 4-13 describes the LEDs on the LMPT.
Table 4-13 LEDs on the panel of the LMPT
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The board is powered on butit is faulty.
Off There is no power supply,or the board is faulty.
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
The board is runningproperly.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The board is being loaded,the board is not started, orthe board is runningproperly.
ALM Red On An alarm is reported,indicating a fault in theboard.
Off The board is workingproperly.
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
An alarm is generated, andthe alarm may be caused byan associated board or portfault. Therefore, you mustlocate the fault beforereplacing the board.
ACT Green On The board works in activemode.
Off The board works in standbymode.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The OML link is disrupted.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-15
Label Color Status Description
Blinking (on for1s and off for 1s)
The board is being tested,such as an RRU VoltageStanding Wave Ratio(VSWR) test through aUSB disk. When anupgrade through a USBdisk is implemented, theACT LED does not blink.
Besides the preceding three LEDs, some other LEDs used for indicating the connection statusof the FE optical port, FE electrical port, commissioning Ethernet port have no silkscreen on theboard. They are near the ports. Table 4-14 describes the LEDs.
Table 4-14 Ports and LEDs
Label Color Status Description
SFP0 and SFP1 Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
ETH Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 Green (LINK) On The connection is setup successfully.
Off No connection is setup.
Orange (ACT) Blinking Data is beingtransmitted.
Off No data is beingtransmitted.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PortTable 4-15 describes the ports on the panel of the LMPT.
Table 4-15 Ports on the panel of the LMPT
Label Connector Type Quantity Application
SFP0 and SFP1 LC 2 Ethernet optical port,used for connectingtransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment
USB USB 1 Software loading
TST USB 1 Testing
ETH RJ45 connector 1 Commissioning
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 RJ45 connector 2 Ethernet electricalport, used forconnectingtransmissionequipment or gatewayequipment
GPS SMA 1 Receiving GPS signals
RST - 1 Resetting theBBU3900
NOTE
SFP0 and FE/GE0 ports on the LMPT are used for one GE input. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.
SFP1 and FE/GE1 ports on the LMPT are used for another GE input. Therefore, they are not usedsimultaneously.
WBBPThe WCDMA Baseband Process Unit (WBBP) of the BBU3900 processes baseband signals.
PanelsThe WBBP has three types of panels, as shown in Figure 4-10, Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12.
Figure 4-10 Panel of the WBBPa
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-17
Figure 4-11 Panel of the WBBPb
Figure 4-12 Panel of the WBBPd
Functions
The WBBP has the following functions:
l Provides the CPRI interface for communication between the BBU and the RRU or RFU,and supports the CPRI interface in 1+1 backup mode.
l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signals.
l The WBBPd supports interference cancellation (IC) within the board.
l When installed in slot 2 or slot 3, the WBBPd supports the IC function of uplink data.
Table 4-16 describes the specifications of the WBBP.
Table 4-16 Specifications of the WBBP
Board Number of Cells UL CE Number DL CE Number
WBBPa 3 128 256
WBBPb1 3 64 64
WBBPb2 3 128 128
WBBPb3 6 256 256
WBBPb4 6 384 384
WBBPd1 6 192 192
WBBPd2 6 384 384
WBBPd3 6 256 256
LEDs
Table 4-17 describes the LEDs on the WBBP and their status.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-17 LEDs on the WBBP and their status
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green ON The board has power input, yetthe board is faulty.
OFF The power supply or the boardis faulty.
Blinking (on for one secondand off for one second)
The board is running properly.
Blinking (on for 0.125 secondand off for 0.125 second)
Software is being loaded to theboard.
ACT Green ON The board is running properly.
OFF The WBBP is not in use.
ALM Red OFF The board is running properly.
ON The board has hardware alarms.
The WBBPa or WBBPb provides three LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDsare positioned below the SFP ports. The WBBPd provides six LEDs indicating the status of theSFP links. The LEDs are positioned above the SFP ports.
Table 4-18 describes the LEDs.
Table 4-18 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links
Label Color Status Description
TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link isavailable.
Steady red The optical modulefails to receivesignals.
Blinking red (ON for0.125 second andOFF for 0.125second)
The RRU on theCPRI link is faulty.
Blinking red (ON forone second and OFFfor one second)
The CPRI link is outof lock.
OFF The SFP module isnot in position or theoptical module ispowered off.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-19
PortsTable 4-19 describes the three CPRI ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb.
Table 4-19 Ports on the panels of the WBBPa and WBBPb
Label Connector Type Description
CPRIx SFP female Data transmission portbetween the BBU and the RFmodule, supporting input andoutput of optical andelectrical signals
The WBBPd has six ports. Table 4-20 describes the ports on the WBBPd.
Table 4-20 Ports on the WBBPd
Label Connector Type Description
CPRI0, CPRI1, CPRI2CPRI3/EIH0, CPRI4/EIH1,CPRI5/EIH2
SFP female Data transmission portbetween the BBU and the RFmodule, supporting input andoutput of optical andelectrical signals
NOTEThe six CPRI ports are available on the WBBPd configured only in slot 2 or 3, and the CPRI ports are notavailable on the WBBPd configured in other port.
LBBPThe LTE BaseBand Processing unit (LBBP) in the BBU3900 processes the baseband signals.
PanelThe LBBP has two types of panels, as shown in Figure 4-13 and Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-13 Panel of the LBBPb
CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT
LBBPb
Figure 4-14 Panel of the LBBPc
CPRI 0 CPRI 1 CPRI 2 CPRI 3 CPRI 4 CPRI 5
TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RX TX RXLBBP RUNALMACT
LBBPc
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTEThe LBBPc can be used in both LTE FDD and LTE TDD modes, and the LBBPb can be used in only LTEFDD mode.
FunctionThe LBBP has the following functions:l Processes uplink and downlink baseband signalsl Provides CPRI ports connected to RF modules
Table 4-21 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE FDD mode.
Table 4-21 Specifications of the LBBP
Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell
AntennaConfiguration
LBBPb 3 10M 2T2R
1 20M 2T2R
1 10M 4T4R
LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R
3 10M 4T4R
1 20M 4T4R
Table 4-22 describes the specifications of the LBBP working in LTE TDD mode.
Table 4-22 Specifications of the LBBP
Board Number of Cells Bandwidth of theCell
AntennaConfiguration
LBBPc 3 20M 2T2R
3 10M 4T4R
1 20M 4T4R
1 - 8T8R
LEDThere are three LEDs on the panel of the LBBP. Table 4-23 describes the LEDs on the LBBP.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-21
Table 4-23 LEDs on the LBBP
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The board is poweredon but is faulty.
Off The board is notpowered on, or it isfaulty.
On for 1s and off for1s
The board is runningproperly.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
Data is being loadedto the board, or theboard is not started.
ALM Red On An alarm is reported,indicating a fault inthe board.
Off The board is normal.
ACT Green On The board works inactive mode.
Off The board works instandby mode.
The LBBP provides six LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links. The LEDs are positionedabove the SFP ports. Table 4-24 describes the LEDs.
Table 4-24 LEDs indicating the status of the SFP links
Label Color Status Description
TX RX Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link isavailable.
Steady red The optical modulemay fail to send orreceive signals. (Thefailure may be causedby a faulty opticalmodule ordisconnected opticalfiber.)
Blinking red (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
The RRU in the CPRIlink has a hardwarefault.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Label Color Status Description
Blinking red (on for1s and off for 1s)
The CPRI link is outof lock (The fault maybe caused by mutuallock of dual-modeclock sources ormismatched data rateover CPRI interfaces,and you are advised tocheck the systemconfiguration) or theVSWR alarm isreported on the RRUsin the CPRI link(because the USBstorage disk is undertest).
Off The SFP module is notin position or theoptical module ispowered off.
Port
Table 4-25 describes the ports on the panel of the LBBP.
Table 4-25 Ports on the LBBP
Label Connector Quantity Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP female 6 The CPRI portsconnect to theLRRUs or LRFUsfor transmittingservice data, clocksignals, andsynchronizationinformation
FAN
The FAN unit for the BBU3900 controls the speed of fans and monitors the temperature of thefan unit. It reports the status of the fans and fan unit, and dissipates heat from the BBU.
Panels
The FAN unit has two types of exterior, which are shown in Figure 4-15 and Figure 4-16.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-23
Figure 4-15 FAN panel
Figure 4-16 FANc panel
NOTEThe FANc has FANc label, which is different from the FAN.
FunctionsThe FAN unit performs the following functions:l Controls the fan speed.l Reports the status, temperature, and in-position signal of the fans to the main control
processing unit.l Monitors the temperature at the air inlet.l Dissipates heat.l The FANc supports the function of reading and writing the information reported by the
electronic label unit.
LEDThe FAN panel has only one LED, which indicates the operating status of the fans. Table4-26 describes the LED.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-26 LED on the FAN panel
Label Color State Meaning
STATE Green On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The module is notregistered, and noalarm is reported.
On for 1s and off for1s
The module isfunctional.
Red Off No alarm isgenerated.
On for 1s and off for1s
The unit is reportingalarms.
UPEUThe Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit (UPEU) for the BBU3900 converts -48V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC.
PanelsThe UPEU is classified into three types: Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit TypeA (UPEUa), Universal Power and Environment Interface Unit Type B (UPEUb), and UniversalPower and Environment Interface Unit Type C (UPEUc). The UPEUa and UPEUc convert -48V DC power into +12 V DC, and the UPEUb converts +24 V DC power into +12 V DC. Figure4-17, Figure 4-18, and Figure 4-19 show the panels of the UPEUa, UPEUb, and UPEUcrespectively.
Figure 4-17 UPEUa panel
(1) BBU power switch
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-25
Figure 4-18 UPEUb panel
(1) BBU power switch
Figure 4-19 UPEUc panel
(1) BBU power switch
NOTEThe UPEUa and UPEUb are differentiated by the silkscreens on the panels, which display -48 V and +24V respectively. The UPEUc has UPEUc label, which is different from the UPEUa.
Functions
The UPEU performs the following functions:
l Converts -48 V DC or +24 V DC power into +12 V DC, which is the operating voltage ofthe boards.
l Provides two RS485 signal ports with each transmitting one RS485 signal and two Booleansignal ports with each transmitting four Boolean signals.
LED
The UPEU has one LED, which indicates the operating status of the UPEU. Table 4-27 describesthe LED.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-27 LED on the panel of the UPEU
Label Color State Meaning
RUN Green On The UPEU isworking properly.
Off The board is poweredon but is faulty.
Ports
The UPEU has two RS485 signal ports with each transmitting one RS485 signal and two Booleansignal ports with each transmitting four Boolean signals. When the UPEU is configured indifferent slots, the ports on the UPEU have different functions. Figure 4-20 shows the slots inthe BBU.
Figure 4-20 Slots in the BBU
Table 4-28 describes the ports on the panel of the UPEU.
Table 4-28 Description on the ports
Slot Label Connector
Quantity Description
Slot 19 +24 V or-48 V
3V3 1 Introducing +24 V DC or -48 V DCpower
EXT-ALM0
RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
EXT-ALM1
RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 input 0
MON1 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 input 1
Slot 18 +24 V or-48 V
3V3 1 Introducing +24 V DC or -48 V DCpower
EXT-ALM0
RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 0 to 3
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-27
Slot Label Connector
Quantity Description
EXT-ALM1
RJ-45 1 Port for Boolean inputs 4 to 7
MON0 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 input 0
MON1 RJ-45 1 Port for RS485 input 1
UEIUThe Universal Environment Interface Unit (UEIU) transmits monitoring and alarm signals fromthe external devices to the main control and transmission unit.
PanelFigure 4-21 shows the panel of the UEIU.
Figure 4-21 Panel of the UEIU
FunctionsThe UEIU performs the following functions:l Provides two ports, each transmitting one RS485 signal.l Provides two ports, each transmitting four Boolean signals.l Transmits monitoring signals and alarm signals from external devices to the main control
and transmission unit.
PortsThe UEIU is configured in slot 18. It provides four ports with two ports transmitting two RS485input signals and the other two ports transmitting eight Boolean signals.
Table 4-29 describes the ports on the panel of the UEIU.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-29 Ports on the panel of the UEIU
Slot Label Connector
Quantity
Description
slot 18 EXT-ALM0
RJ-45 1 No.0 to 3 Boolean signal input ports
EXT-ALM1
RJ-45 1 No.4 to 7 Boolean signal input ports
MON0 RJ-45 1 No.0 RS485 signal input port
MON1 RJ-45 1 No.1 RS485 signal input port
USCUThis section describes the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU).
PanelThere are two types of USCU: USCUb1 and USCUb2, as shown in Figure 4-22 and Figure4-23.
Figure 4-22 Panel of the USCUb1 (0.5 U)
Figure 4-23 Panel of the USCUb2 (1 U)
(1) GPS port (2) RGPS port (3) TOD port (4) M-1PPS port (5) BITS port
FunctionsThe USCU has the following functions:
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-29
l The USCU provides interface for an external RGPS device (such as a reused device of theoperator), Metro1000 device, BITS device, and TOD input.
l The USCUb1 has the GPS receiver. It is used for clock synchronization or obtainingaccurate clock signals from transmission devices.
l A dual-satellite receiver is configured in a USCUb2, which supports GPS, GLONASS, orCOMPASS clock signals.
LEDTable 4-30 and Table 4-31 describe the LEDs on the USCU.
Table 4-30 LEDs on the USCU
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green On There is power supply, and theboard is faulty.
Off There is no power supply, or theboard is faulty.
Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)
The board is running properly.
Blinking (on for0.125s and off for0.125s)
Software is being loaded to theboard, or the board is notconfigured.
ALM Red Off The board is running properly,and no alarm is generated.
On An alarm is generated, and theboard needs to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1sand off for 1s)
An alarm is generated. Thealarm may be caused due tofaults in the related boards orports. Therefore, whether theboard needs to be replacedcannot be determined.
ACT Green On The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is enabled.
Off The serial port forcommunication between theUSCU and the main controlboard is disabled.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-31 LEDs on the TOD port
Color Meaning Default Configuration
Green On: The TOD port isconfigured as the inputport.
The green LED of the TOD0 port is off,and the yellow LED of the TOD0 port ison.
Yellow Off: The TOD port isconfigured as the outputport.
The yellow LED of the TOD1 port is off,and the green LED of the TOD1 port is on.
PortsTable 4-32 describes the ports on the USCU.
Table 4-32 Ports on the USCU
Port Connector Description
GPS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives GPS signals
RGPS port PCB weldedwiring terminal
Receives RGPS signals
TOD0 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals
TOD1 port RJ-45 connector Receives or transmits 1PPS+TOD signals, andreceives TOD signals from the M1000
BITS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives BITS clock signals, and supports adaptiveinput of 2.048 MHz and 10 MHz clock referencesource
M-1PPS port SMA coaxialconnector
Receives 1PPS signals from the M1000
UTRPThis describes the Universal Transmission Processing unit (UTRP) board. As the transmissionextension board of the BBU3900, the UTRP provides eight E1s/T1s, one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port, four electrical ports, or two optical ports.
SpecificationTable 4-33 describes the specifications of the UTRP.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-31
Table 4-33 Specifications of the UTRP
Board Sub-board/Board Type Port
UTRP2 UEOC Two universal FE/GE opticalport
UTRP3 UAEC Ports for eight channels ofATM over E1/T1
UTRP4 UIEC Ports for eight channels of IPover E1/T1
UTRPb4 - Ports for eight channels ofTDM over E1/T1
UTRP6 UUAS Port for one unchannelizedSTM-1/OC-3
UTRP9 UQEC Four universal FE/GEelectrical ports
PanelsFigure 4-24 shows the panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.
Figure 4-24 Panel of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports
Figure 4-25 shows the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.
Figure 4-25 Panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4, and UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1sRUNALMACT
E1/T1(0-3)
UTRP
E1/T1(4-7)
Figure 4-26 shows the panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.
Figure 4-26 Panel of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1
Figure 4-27 shows the panel of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 4-27 Panel of the UTRP supporting four electrical ports
Functions
The UTRP has the following functions:
l The UTRP2 provides two 100M/1000M Ethernet optical ports, performs functions of theMAC layer, receives and transmits data on Ethernet links, and analyzes the MAC address.
l The UTRP3 provides eight E1s/T1s and performs inverse multiplexing and demultiplexingon a single ATM cell flow on the eight E1/T1 links.
l The UTRP4 provides eight E1s/T1s, frames and deframes HDLC frames, and allocates andcontrols the 256 HDLC timeslot channels.
l The UTRP4 provides an E1/T1 port for four TDM transmission links in GSM mode andprovides a port for four transmission links in another mode for co-transmission in a dual-mode base station.
l The UTRP6 supports one unchannelized STM-1/OC-3 port.
l The UTRP9 provides four 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet electrical ports and performs thefunctions of the MAC layer and physical layer.
l The cold backup is supported.
LEDs
Table 4-34 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UTRP.
Table 4-34 LEDs on the panel of the UTRP
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green ON The board has powerinput, but the board isfaulty.
OFF The board has nopower input, or theboard is faulty.
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board is runningproperly.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board is notconfigured or isloading software.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board is in theoffline state or undertest.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-33
Label Color Status Description
ALM Red ON or blinkingrapidly
The board isreporting alarms.
OFF The board is runningproperly.
ON for 2s and OFFfor 2s
The board isreporting a minoralarm.
ON for 1s and OFFfor 1s
The board isreporting a majoralarm.
ON for 0.125s andOFF for 0.125s
The board isreporting a criticalalarm.
ACT Green ON The board is in activemode.
OFF The board is instandby mode.
UTRP2 and UTRP9 provide two LEDs for indicating the status of the current link. Table4-35 describes the LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9.
Table 4-35 LEDs on the Ethernet ports of the UTRP2 and UTRP9
Label Color Status Description
LINK Green OFF The link isdisconnected.
ON The link is properlyconnected.
ACT Orange Blinking The link is receivingor transmitting data.
OFF The link is notreceiving ortransmitting data.
PortsTable 4-36 describes the ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-36 Ports of the UTRP2 supporting two optical ports
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
FE/GE0 to FE/GE1 FE/GE optical port 2 SFP connector
Table 4-37 describes the ports on the UTRP3 and UTRP4 supporting eight E1s/T1s.
Table 4-37 Ports on the panel of the UTRP3, UTRP4 an UTRPb4 supporting eight E1s/T1s
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
E1/T1 E1/T1 port 2 DB26 connector
Table 4-38 describes the port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1.
Table 4-38 Port of the UTRP6 supporting one STM-1
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
STM-1/OC-3 STM-1/OC-3 port 1 SFP connector
Table 4-39 describes the ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports.
Table 4-39 Ports of the UTRP9 supporting four electrical ports
Label Port Type Quantity Connector Type
FE/GE0 to FE/GE3 FE/GE electrical port 4 RJ-45 connector
DIP SwitchesThere is no DIP switch on the UTRP2, UTRP6, and UTRP9.
The UTRP3, UTRP4, or UTRPb4 has three DIP switches numbered from SW1 to SW3. SW1and SW2 are used to set the grounding status of the eight E1s. SW3 is used to set matchedimpedance for the eight E1s. Figure 4-28 shows the DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4,Figure 4-29 shows the DIP switch on the UTRPb4.
Figure 4-28 DIP switch on the UTRP3 or UTRP4
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-35
Figure 4-29 DIP switch on the UTRPb4
Table 4-40, Table 4-41, and Table 4-42 describe how to set the DIP switches on the UTRP.
Table 4-40 DIP switch SW1 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW1 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
Table 4-41 DIP switch SW2 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW2 OFF OFF OFF OFF BalancedMode
ON ON ON ON UnbalancedMode
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CAUTIONSW1 and SW2 are set to OFF (balanced mode) by default. When the eight E1s are faulty, all theDIP bits of SW1 and SW2 should be set to ON to rectify faults. SW1 corresponds to E1s No.4to No.7 and SW2 corresponds to E1s No.0 to No.3.
Table 4-42 DIP switch SW3 on the UTRP
DIPSwitch
DIP Status Description
1 2 3 4
SW3 OFF OFF ON ON T1 Mode
ON ON OFF OFF The E1impedance isset to 120ohms.
ON ON ON ON The E1impedance isset to 75ohms.
Other settings of the DIP bits Disabled
UBRI
The Universal Baseband Radio Interface Board (UBRI) provides extended CPRI optical orelectrical ports to implement convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on theCPRI.
Panel
Figure 4-30 shows the panel of the UBRI.
Figure 4-30 Panel of the UBRI
Functions
The UBRI performs the following functions:l Provides extended CPRI optical or electrical portsl Performs convergence, distribution, and multi-mode transmission on the CPRI
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-37
LEDsTable 4-43 describes the LEDs on the panel of the UBRI.
Table 4-43 LEDs on the panel of the UBRI
LED Color State Description
RUN Green ON steady There is powersupply, but the boardis faulty.
OFF steady There is no powersupply, or the boardis in the alarm status.
1s ON, 1s OFF The board worksproperly.
0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF
The board is loadingsoftware.
ALM Red ON or blinking at ahigh frequency
The board is in thealarm status.
OFF steady No alarm isgenerated.
ACT Green ON steady The board worksproperly.
OFF steady The board is notworking.
The UBRI provides six LEDs indicating the status of the CRRI links, which are above the SFPports. Table 4-44 describes the CPRI link status LED.
Table 4-44 CPRI link status LED
Label Color State Description
CPRIx Red/Green ON (green) The CPRI link isavailable.
ON (red) The optical modulefails to receivesignals.
0.125s ON, 0.125sOFF (Red)
The RRU on the CPRIlink is faulty.
1s ON, 1s OFF (red) The CPRI link is outof lock.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PortsTable 4-45 describes the ports on the panel of the UBRI.
Table 4-45 Ports on the panel of the UBRI
Label Connector Port Quantity Description
CPRI0 to CPRI5 SFP 6 Connecting the BBUand the RF module
4.2 GRFUThe GSM Radio Frequency Unit (GRFU) is designed on the basis of multi-transceivertechnology. One GRFU supports 6 carriers.
PanelFigure 4-31 shows the GRFU panel.
Figure 4-31 GRFU panel
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-39
FunctionsThe GRFU performs modulation and demodulation of baseband signals and RF signals,processes data, and combines or divides signals.
The GRFU has the following functions:
l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel, modulatesthe baseband signals to GSM RF signals; then sends the signals to the antenna fortransmission through the duplex filter after filtering, amplifying, and combining the RFsignals (the combining can be performed as required)
l Receives RF signals from the antenna and performs down-conversion, amplification,analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and AutomaticGain Control (AGC), and then transmits the signals to the BBU for further processing
l Provides power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detectionl Provides reverse power detectionl Provides frequency synthesis and loopback testl Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock of lost synchronization, and detects
alarms
The GRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,and duplexer. Figure 4-32 shows the logical structure of the GRFU.
Figure 4-32 Logical structure of the GRFU
The High-speed interface unit has the following functions:l Transmits the signals received from the BBU to the signal processing unitl Transmits the signals received from the signal processing unit to the BBU
The signal processing unit consists of two UL RX channels and one DL TX channel.l The UL RX channel has the following functions:
– Performs down-conversion of the RF signals to IF signals– Amplifies the IF signals and performs IQ demodulation– Performs analog-to-digital conversion through the ADC
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
– Samples digital signals– Performs matched filtering– Performs Digital Automatic Gain Control (DAGC)– Encapsulates data
l The DL TX channel has the following functions:– Processes the clock signals, control signals, and data signals from the BBU and sends
them to associated units– Shapes and filters DL signals– Performs digital-to-analog conversion through the DAC and performs IQ modulation– Performs up-conversion of RF signals to the transmit band
The power amplifier amplifies the low-power RF signals from the signal processing unit.
The duplexer has the following functions:l Multiplexes the RX signals and TX signalsl Enables RX signals and TX signals to share one antenna channell Filters RX signals and TX signals
LEDsThe six LEDs on the GRFU panel indicate the operating status of the GRFU. Table 4-46describes the LEDs on the GRFU panel.
Table 4-46 LEDs on the GRFU panel
Label Color State Description
RUN Green ON The power input is normal, but themodule is faulty.
OFF There is no power input, or the moduleis faulty.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The module runs properly.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The module is loading software or isnot started.
ALM Red ON An alarm is generated, and the moduleneeds to be replaced.
Blinking (ON for 1s andOFF for 1s)
An alarm is generated. The alarm maybe caused by the fault of the relatedmodule or port. Therefore, whether themodule needs to be replaced cannot bedetermined.
OFF No alarm is generated.
ACT Green ON The module works properly (the TXchannel is set to ON).
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-41
Label Color State Description
ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The module is running (the TXchannel is set to OFF).
VSWR Red ON (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.
Blinking (ON for 1s andOFF for 1s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_RXB port.
Blinking (ON for0.125s and OFF for0.125s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXBports.
OFF (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.
CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s (red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s (red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
Ports
Table 4-47 describes the ports on the GRFU panel.
Table 4-47 Ports on the GRFU panel
Port Label Connector Description
RF port ANT_RXB DIN RF RX port, connected to the antennasystem
ANT_TX/RXA
DIN RF TX/RX port, connected to the antennasystem
CPRI CPRI0 SFP female Connected to the BBU, or the upper-levelRFU during the cascading
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Port Label Connector Description
CPRI1 SFP female Connected to the lower-level RFU duringthe cascading
Interconnection port for RFRX signals
RX_INB QMA female Input port of diversity signals in theantenna channel
RX_OUTA QMA female Output port of diversity signals in theantenna channel
Power supplysocket
PWR 3V3 power Feeding power
Monitoringport
MON RJ-45 Monitoring port
4.3 DRFUThe Double Radio Frequency Unit (DRFU) is a dual-density RF unit. A DRFU processes twocarriers.
PanelThere are two types of DRFU, that is, the DRFU of 900 MHz and DRFU of 1800 MHz. Thepanels of the DRFUs are shown in Figure 4-33 and Figure 4-34.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-43
Figure 4-33 Panel of the DRFU of 900 MHz
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 4-34 Panel of the DRFU of 1800 MHz
NOTE
The DRFU of 1800 MHz is supported by V300R009 and later versions.
Functions
The DRFU performs modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, processes data,combines and divides the signals.
Both the DRFU of 900 MHz and DRFU of 1800 MHz perform the following functions:
l Adopts the direct frequency conversion technology, modulates the baseband signals to theGSM TX band. After filtering and amplification, the baseband signals are transmitted tothe antenna system through the duplex filter.
l Receives uplink RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to theBBU for further processing.
l Performs power control.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-45
l Performs reverse power detection.l Synthesizes frequencies and tests loops.l Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms.
In addition, the DRFU of 900 MHz can be equipped with the Frequency Domain Reflectometer(FDR) to implement the accurate VSWR test.
The modules inside the DRFU consist of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit,power amplifier, and dual-duplexer unit. Figure 4-35 shows the logical structure of the DRFU.
Figure 4-35 Logical structure of the DRFU
The high-speed interface unit performs the following functions:l Adapts and transfers the signals from the BBU to the signal processing unit.l Adapts and transfers the signals from the signal processing unit to the BBU.
The signal processing unit consists of two uplink RX channels and two downlink TX channels.l The uplink RX channels perform the following functions:
– Down-converts the received RF signals to Intermediate Frequency (IF) signals.– Amplifies the IF signals and performs IQ modulation.– Performs analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion through the ADC.– Performs digital sampling.– Performs matched filtering.– Performs Digital Automatic Gain Control (DAGC).– Encapsulates the data.
l The downlink TX channels perform the following functions:– Processes the signals (timing signals, control signals, and data signals) from the BBU
and sends them to the associated units.– Shapes and filters downlink signals.– Performs digital-to-analog (D/A) conversion through the DAC and performs IQ
modulation.– Up-converts RF signals to the TX band.
The PA amplifies the low-power RF signals that are received from the signal processing unit.
The dual-duplexer unit performs the following functions:
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l Multiplexes the RX and TX signals of the RF channels.
l Enables the TX and RX signals to share the same antenna channel.
l Filters the RX and TX signals.
LEDs
There are six LEDs on the panel of the DRFU, indicating its operating status. Table 4-48describes the status of the LEDs on the DRFU.
Table 4-48 Status of the LEDs on the DRFU
LED Color State Meaning
RUN Green On There is power supply, but the moduleis faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The module is functional.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The module is loading software or is notstarted.
Off There is no power supply, or the moduleis faulty.
ALM Red On Alarms are generated, and the moduleneeds to be replaced.
On for 1s and off for 1s Alarms are reported. The alarms maybe caused by the faults of the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, whether themodule needs to be replaced cannot bedecided.
Off No alarm is generated.
ACT Green On The board works properly with the TXchannel enabled.
On for 1s and off for 1s The module works properly with theTX channel disabled.
VSWR Red On The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT1 port.
On for 1s and off for 1s The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT2 port.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The VSWR alarm is generated on theANT1 and ANT2 ports.
Off No VSWR alarm is reported.
CPRI0 Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link is functional.
Steady red The optical module fails to receivesignals.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-47
LED Color State Meaning
On for 1s (red) and offfor 1s
The CPRI link is out of lock.
Off The SFP module is not in position or theoptical module is powered off.
CPRI1 Red/Green Steady green The CPRI link is functional.
Steady red The optical module fails to receivesignals.
On for 1s (red) and offfor 1s
The CPRI link is out of lock.
Off The SFP module is not in position or theoptical module is powered off.
PortsTable 4-49 describes the ports and sockets on the DRFU.
Table 4-49 Ports and sockets on the DRFU
Port Connector Label Description
Port fortransceivingRF signals
DIN female ANT1 Connecting to the antenna system
ANT2
CPRI port SFP female CPRI0 Connecting to the lower-level RFUduring the cascading
CPRI1 Connecting to the BBU, or the upper-level RFU in cascading mode
Interconnection port forreceiving RFsignals
QMA female RX1/IN Diversity RX port in antenna channel 1
RX1/OUT Diversity TX port in antenna channel 1
RX2/IN Diversity RX port in antenna channel 2
RX2/OUT Diversity TX port in antenna channel 2
Power supplysocket
3V3 PWR Used to lead in power
QMA QMA female FIXED Unique port of the DRFU of 1800 MHz,which is used to switch between thecombined transmission and dividedtransmission modes
UNCOMB
COMB
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
4.4 WRFUOne WCDMA Radio Filter Unit (WRFU) supports 2 carriers or 4 carriers.
Panel
Figure 4-36 shows the panel of the WRFU.
Figure 4-36 Panel of the WRFU
Functions
The functions of the WRFU are as follows:
l Implements the direct frequency conversion technique in the transmit channel. Thebaseband signals are modulated to WCDMA RF signals. After being filtered and amplifiedor being combined, the RF signals are transmitted through the duplex filter to the antennafor radio transmission.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-49
l Receives UL RF signals from the antenna system and then down-converts the receivedsignals to IF signals. After amplification, analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, automatic gain control (AGC), the IF signals are sent to theBBU for further processing.
l Implements power control and Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detectionl Provides reverse power detectionl Provides frequency synthesis and loopback testl Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarmsl Supports 40 W (2 carriers) and 80 W (4 carriers) power outputs
PrincipleThe WRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,and duplex unit. Figure 4-37 shows the principle of the WRFU.
Figure 4-37 Principle of the WRFU
The high-speed interface unit has the following functions:l Transmits the signals received from the BBU to the signal processing unitl Transmits the signals received from the signal processing unit to the BBU
The signal processing unit consists of two UL RX channels and one DL TX channel.
l The UL RX channel has the following functions:– Performs down-conversion of the RF signals to IF signals– Amplifies the IF signals and performs IQ demodulation– Converts analog signals to digital signals– Samples digital signals– Performs matched filtering– Performs AGC– Encapsulates data
l The DL TX channel has the following functions:– Decapsulates the clock signals, control signals, and data signals from the BBU and sends
them to associated units– Shapes and filters DL signals
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
– Performs digital-to-analog conversion and IQ modulation– Performs orthogonal up-conversion of IF signals to the TX band
The power amplifier amplifies the low-power RF signals from the signal processing unit.
The duplexer has the following functions:l Multiplexes the RX signals and TX signalsl Enables RX signals and TX signals to share one antenna channell Filters RX signals and TX signals
LEDsTable 4-50 describes the LEDs on the WRFU panel.
Table 4-50 LEDs on the MRFU panel
Label Color State Description
RUN Green ON The power input is normal, but themodule is faulty.
OFF There is no power input, or the moduleis faulty.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The module runs properly.
ON for 0.125s and OFFfor 0.125s
The module is loading software or isnot started.
ALM Red ON An alarm is generated, and the moduleneeds to be replaced.
Blinking (ON for 1s andOFF for 1s)
An alarm is generated. The alarm maybe caused by the fault of the relatedmodule or port. Therefore, whether themodule needs to be replaced cannot bedetermined.
OFF No alarm is generated.
ACT Green ON The module works properly (the TXchannel is set to ON).
ON for 1s and OFF for1s
The module is running (the TXchannel is set to OFF).
VSWR Red ON (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.
Blinking (ON for 1s andOFF for 1s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_RXB port.
Blinking (ON for0.125s and OFF for0.125s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXBports.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-51
Label Color State Description
OFF (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.
CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s (red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
ON for 1s and OFF for1s (red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
OFF The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
PortsTable 4-51 describes the ports on the WRFU panel.
Table 4-51 Ports on the WRFU panel
Port Label Connector Description
RF port ANT_RXB DIN RF RX port, connected to the antennasystem
ANT_TX/RXA
DIN RF TX/RX port, connected to the antennasystem
CPRI CPRI0 SFP female Connected to the BBU, or the upper-levelWRFU during the cascading
CPRI1 SFP female Connected to the lower-level WRFUduring the cascading
Interconnection port for RFRX signals
RX_INB QMA female Input port of diversity signals in theantenna channel
RX_OUTA QMA female Output port of diversity signals in theantenna channel
Power supplysocket
PWR 2V2 power Feeding power
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Port Label Connector Description
Commissioning port
MON RJ-45 Used for commissioning
4.5 MRFUOne Multi-Mode Radio Frequency Unit (MRFU) supports a maximum of six carriers.
PanelFigure 4-38 shows the panel of the MRFU.
Figure 4-38 Panel of the MRFU
FunctionsThe MRFU has the following functions:
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-53
l Modulates and converts the signals to the TX band by up-converting the IF signals, filtersand amplifies the signals, and then transmits the signals to the antenna through the duplexer
l Receives RF signals from the antenna and performs down-conversion, amplification,analog-to-digital conversion, digital down-conversion, matched filtering, and DigitalAutomatic Gain Control (DAGC), and then transmits the signals to the BBU for furtherprocessing
l Performs power controll Provides Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) detectionl Supplies power to the TMA and controls the RET antennal Controls DPD feedback signalsl Generates the CPRI clock, recovers the CPRI clock from loss of synchronization, and
detects alarms
PrincipleThe MRFU consists of the high-speed interface unit, signal processing unit, power amplifier,and duplex unit. Figure 4-39 shows the logical structure of the MRFU.
Figure 4-39 Logical structure of the MRFU
The high-speed interface unit has the following functions:l Transmits the signals received from the BBU to the signal processing unitl Transmits the signals received from the signal processing unit to the BBU
The signal processing unit consists of two uplink RX channels and one downlink TX channel.
l The uplink RX channels have the following functions:– Down-convert the RF signals to IF signals– Amplify the IF signals and performing IQ demodulation– Convert analog signals to digital signals– Sample digital signals– Perform matched filtering– Support the digital automatic gain control (DAGC)
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
– Encapsulate data
l The downlink TX channel has the following functions:
– Decapsulates the clock signals, control signals and data signals from the BBU and sendsthem to associated units
– Shapes and filters downlink signals
– Performs digital-to-analog conversion and IF output of IQ analog signals
– Performs orthogonal up-conversion of IF signals to the TX band
The power amplifier amplifies the low-power RF signals from the signal processing unit.
The duplexer has the following functions:
l Multiplexes the RX signals and TX signals
l Combines the RX signals and TX signals so that they share the same antenna channel
l Filters the RX/TX signals
LEDs
Table 4-52 describes the LEDs on the panel of the MRFU.
Table 4-52 LEDs on the panel of the MRFU
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The power input is normal, and themodule is faulty.
Off There is no power input, or the moduleis faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The module runs properly.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The module is loading software or isnot started.
ALM Red On An alarm is generated, and the moduleneeds to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)
An alarm is generated. The alarm maybe caused due to faults in the relatedboards or ports. Therefore, whether themodule needs to be replaced cannot bedetermined.
Off No alarm is generated.
ACT Green On The module works properly (TXchannel enabled).
On for 1s and off for 1s The module is running (TX channeldisabled).
VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-55
Label Color Status Description
Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_RXB port.
Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_RXBports.
Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.
CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
On for 1s and off for 1s(red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
Off The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module isabnormal, and an alarm is generated.
On for 1s and off for 1s(red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
Off The SFP is out of position, or theoptical module is powered off.
Ports
Table 4-53 describes the ports on the panel of the MRFU.
Table 4-53 Ports on the panel of the MRFU
Port Label Connector Function
RF Port ANT_RXB DINconnector
RF RX port, connected to the antennasystem
ANT_TX/RXA
DINconnector
RF TX/RX port, connected to the antennasystem
CPRI interface CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector
Connected to the BBU or the upper-levelcascaded MRFU
CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector
Connected to the lower-level cascadedMRFU
Inter-MRFURF signal port
RX_INB QMA femaleconnector
Input port for diversity receive
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Port Label Connector Function
RX_OUTA QMA femaleconnector
Output port for main receive
Power supplysocket
PWR 3V3 powerconnector
Introducing power input
Monitoringports
MON RJ-45connector
Monitoring and maintaining port
4.6 LRFULTE Radio Frequency Units (LRFUs) work in Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) mode.
PanelFigure 4-40 shows the panel of the LRFU.
Figure 4-40 Panel of the LRFU
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-57
FunctionsThe LRFU processes uplink and downlink services and controls and monitors internal boardsor modules. Figure 4-41 shows the logical structure of the LRFU.
Figure 4-41 Logical structure of the LRFU
The uplink RX channels implement the following functions:
l Filters and amplifies two uplink signals and performs digital down-conversion, analog-to-digital (A/D) conversion, digital Inphase Quadrature (IQ) signal demodulation, andmatched filtering.
l Performs uplink Automatic Gain Control (AGC) and stabilizes the level in the IQ digitaldomain of the BBU-RFU interface.
l Frames the IQ signals of the BBU-RFU interface.l Reports the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI).
The downlink TX channels implement the following functions:
l Deframes the IQ signals of the BBU-RFU interface.l Shapes and filters downlink IQ signals, performs digital up-conversion, digital-to-analog
(D/A) conversion, and amplifies the power.l Reports the transmit power.l Provides overload protection of the power amplifier.l Enables or disables TX channels.l Provides closed-loop power control.l Simulates the downlink load.
The control module implements the following functions:
l Provides the interface for reporting backup power alarms.l Provides the functions of the Remote Electrical antenna Tilt (RET) antenna.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l Supports the Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA).l Provides the BBU-RFU port for signal transmission by using the CPRI electrical cable or
optical cable.
LEDsTable 4-54 describes the LEDs on the panel of the LRFU.
Table 4-54 LEDs on the LRFU
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green On The power input is normal, but themodule is faulty.
Off There is no power input, or the moduleis faulty.
On for 1s and off for 1s The module runs properly.
On for 0.125s and offfor 0.125s
The module is loading software or isnot started.
ALM Red On An alarm is generated, and the moduleneeds to be replaced.
Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)
An alarm is generated. The alarm maybe caused by the fault of the relatedmodule or port. Therefore, thereplacement of the module cannot bedetermined.
Off No alarm is generated.
ACT Green On The module works properly (TXchannel enabled).
On for 1s and Off for 1s The module is running (TX channeldisabled).
VSWR Red On (red) A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA port.
Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXB port.
Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)
A VSWR-related alarm is generated atthe ANT_TX/RXA and ANT_TX/RXB ports.
Off (red) No VSWR alarm is generated.
CPRI0 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module (orthe SFP module) is abnormal, and analarm is generated.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-59
Label Color Status Description
On for 1s and off for 1s(red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.
CPRI1 Red/Green On (green) The CPRI links are normal.
On (red) The reception of the optical module (orthe SFP module) is abnormal, and analarm is generated.
On for 1s and off for 1s(red)
The CPRI link has a loss-of-lock error.
Off The SFP module is out of position, orthe optical module is powered off.
Port
Table 4-55 describes the ports on the panel of the LRFU.
Table 4-55 Ports on the panel of the LRFU
Label Connector Description
ANT_TX/RXB DIN TX/RX port for RF signalsUsed for the connection to the antenna systemANT_TX/RXA DIN
CPRI0 SFP femaleconnector
CPRI portUsed for the connection to the BBU. CPRI0 port andCPRI1 port work in mutual backup mode.
CPRI1 SFP femaleconnector
CPRI portUsed for the connection to the BBU. CPRI1 port andCPRI0 port work in mutual backup mode.
PWR 3V3 powerconnector
Power portUsed for feeding -48 V DC input power
MON RJ-45 connector Monitoring portPort for monitoring and maintenance
4.7 DCDU-01The Direct Current Distribution Unit-01 (DCDU-01) supplies DC power to each component inthe cabinet.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
PanelFigure 4-42 shows the panel of the DCDU-01.
Figure 4-42 Panel of the DCDU-01
FunctionsThe DCDU-01 has the following functions:
l Supports one -48 V DC inputsl Supports ten -48 V DC outputs
– One 25 A output to the SPARE2 port– Nine 12 A outputs to other ports
l Supplies power to only the BBU3900, RFUs, and fan box in the cabinet, but not externaldevices
PortsTable 4-56 describes the ports, terminals, and power switches on the panel of the DCDU-01.
Table 4-56 Ports, terminals, and power switches on the panel of the DCDU-01
Port Label Connector Description
Power inputwiringterminals
NEG(-) OT terminal Negative input wiringterminal
RTN(+) Positive input wiringterminal
Power outputport
SPARE2, SPARE1,BBU, FAN, andRFU5 to RFU0
Parallel terminal Providing 10 poweroutputs to the modulessuch as the BBU3900,RFUs, and fan box
Power switch SPARE2, SPARE1,BBU, FAN, andRFU5 to RFU0
- Powering on or poweringoff the modules such asthe BBU3900, RFUs, andfan box
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-61
4.8 Fan BoxA fan box consists of a fan tray, four fans, and an FMU.
Figure 4-43 shows a fan box.
Figure 4-43 Fan box
(1) Fan (2) Fan tray (3) FMU
The fan box performs the following functions:l Provides forced ventilation and heat dissipation for the cabinet.l Monitors the temperature.l Supports fan speed adjustment based on temperature or controlled by the BBU.l Stops the fans when the ambient temperature is low.
Figure 4-44 shows the ports on the FMU board.
Figure 4-44 Ports on the FMU board
Table 4-57 describes the LEDs on the FMU board.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-57 LEDs on the FMU board
LED Color Status Meaning
RUN Green Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)
The unit is functional but fails tocommunicate with the BBU or upper-level FMU.
Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)
The unit is functional and iscommunicating with the BBU orupper-level FMU.
Off There is no power supply, or themodule is faulty.
ALM Red Blinking (on for 1s and offfor 1s)
The module is reporting alarms.
Off No alarm is generated.
Table 4-58 describes the ports on the FMU board.
Table 4-58 Ports on the FMU board
Port Type Label ConnectorType
Description
Power port -48 V 3V3 powerconnector
The port is used tointroduce the -48 V DCpower supply.
Sensor port SENSOR RJ-45 connector The port is connected to theELU.
Communication port
COM OUT RJ-45 connector The port is connected to thelower-level FMU.
COM IN RJ-45 connector The port is connected to theBBU or upper-level FMU.
4.9 GATMThe GSM Antenna and TMA control Module (GATM) controls the antenna and TMA.
PanelFigure 4-45 shows the GATM panel.
Figure 4-45 GATM panel
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-63
Function
The GATM has the following functions:
l Controls the RET antenna.
l Supplies power to the TMA.
l Reports the RET control signal alarms.
l Monitors the current from the feeder.
NOTE
The GATM cannot support the TMA and RET antenna simultaneously.
LED
On the GATM there are three LEDs, which indicate the operating status of the GATM. Table4-59 describes the LEDs on the GATM.
Table 4-59 LEDs on the GATM
LED Color Status Description
RUN Green ON for 2s and OFF for 2s The power supply is normal, but thecommunication with the BBU incursfaults.
ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The module is functional andcommunicates with the BBUproperly.
OFF There is no power supply, or themodule is faulty.
ACT Green ON The AISG link is available.
OFF The AISG link is unavailable.
Blinking irregularly The AISG link is in transmissionstate.
ALM Red ON An alarm is generated, such as anovercurrent alarm.
OFF The module is functional.
Port ID
There are eight ports on the GATM, of which six are used to supply power to the TMA or transmitthe RET control signals, one is used to connect the GATM to the BBU, and one is used as anextended RS485 port. In addition, there is also a -48 V DC power supply socket. Table 4-60describes the ports and socket on the GATM.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-60 Ports and socket on the GATM
Port ID Connector Function
ANT0 to ANT5 SMA female connector Providing power and transmitting controlsignals for the RET antenna
COM1 RJ-45 connector Connecting to the BBU
COM2 RJ-45 connector Serving as an extended RS485 port forconnecting to other devices
-48 V 3V3 power connector Feeding -48 V DC power
4.10 ELUThe Electronic Label Unit (ELU) reports the cabinet type information to the fan box.
Figure 4-46 shows an ELU.
Figure 4-46 ELU
4.11 Power Equipment (DC/DC)The power equipment (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power.
4.11.1 Components of the Power Equipment (DC/DC)The power equipment (DC/DC) consists of the PSUs (DC/DC) and power subrack (DC/DC).
4.11.2 PSU (DC/DC)The PSU is the power supply unit. The PSU (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DCpower.
4.11.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC)The power subrack (DC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, power output wiringterminals, ALM port, and PRESENT port. The terminals and ports are used for the connectionsof the +24 V input power cables, -48 V output power cables, monitoring signal cable for thePSU, and in-position signal cable for the PSU respectively.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-65
4.11.1 Components of the Power Equipment (DC/DC)The power equipment (DC/DC) consists of the PSUs (DC/DC) and power subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-47 shows the power equipment (DC/DC).
Figure 4-47 Power equipment (DC/DC)
(1) PSUs (DC/DC) (2) Power subrack (DC/DC)
Table 4-61 describes the components of the power equipment (DC/DC).
Table 4-61 Components of the power equipment (DC/DC)
Component Description
PSU (DC/DC) For details, see 4.11.2 PSU (DC/DC).
Power subrack (DC/DC) For details, see 4.11.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC).
4.11.2 PSU (DC/DC)The PSU is the power supply unit. The PSU (DC/DC) converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DCpower.
PanelFigure 4-48 shows the panel of the PSU (DC/DC).
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 4-48 Panel of the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) Power LED (2) Protection LED (3) Fault LED
Functionsl Converts +24 V DC power into -48 V DC power and leads the -48 V DC power into the
DCDU-01.
l Monitors the unit and reports alarms related to PSU faults (such as output overvoltage, nooutput, and fan faults), alarms related to PSU protection (such as overtemperatureprotection, and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and PSU out-of-positionalarms, if any.
LEDs
Table 4-62 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PSU (DC/DC).
Table 4-62 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (DC/DC)
LED Color Status Description
Power LED Green On The power supply isnormal.
Off There is no powerinput, or the fuse isdamaged.
Protection LED Yellow Off The running status isnormal.
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-67
LED Color Status Description
On There is abnormalinput or outputvoltage, the unit isoverheated, or theunit is not properlyinserted.
Fault LED Red Off The running status isnormal.
Blinking The fan is faulty.
4.11.3 Power Subrack (DC/DC)The power subrack (DC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, power output wiringterminals, ALM port, and PRESENT port. The terminals and ports are used for the connectionsof the +24 V input power cables, -48 V output power cables, monitoring signal cable for thePSU, and in-position signal cable for the PSU respectively.
Exterior
Figure 4-49 shows the power subrack (DC/DC).
Figure 4-49 Power Subrack (DC/DC)
(1) Power input wiringterminals
(2) PRESENT port (3) ALM port (4) Power output wiringterminals
Ports
Table 4-63 describes the ports and terminals on the power subrack (DC/DC).
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 4-63 Ports and terminals on the power subrack (DC/DC)
Terminal/Port
Label Connector Description
Power inputwiring terminal
DC INPUT OT terminal The + wiring terminals are used for theconnections of +24 V power cables, andthe - wiring terminals are used for theconnections of +24 V RTN cables.
Power outputwiring terminal
DCOUTPUT
OT terminal The LOAD- wiring terminals are usedfor the connections of the -48 V powercables, and the RTN+ wiring terminalsare used for the connections of the -48 VRTN cables.
Alarm signalport
ALM Cord endterminal
The ALM port is used for the connectionof the monitoring signal cable for thePSU.
PRESENT port PRESENT RJ-45connector
The PRESENT port is used for theconnection of the in-position signalcable for the PSU.
4.12 Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power.
4.12.1 Components of the Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) consists of the PMU, PSUs (AC/DC) and power subrack (AC/DC).
4.12.2 PMUThe Power and Environment Monitoring Unit (PMU) performs the power system management,power distribution detection, and alarm reporting functions.
4.12.3 PSU (AC/DC)The PSU is a power supply unit. The PSU (AC/DC) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DCpower.
4.12.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC)The power subrack (AC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, wiring terminals forbatteries, and battery power output wiring terminal. The terminals are used for the connectionsof the input power cables, output power cables, and power cable for the batteries respectively.
4.12.1 Components of the Power Equipment (AC/DC)The power equipment (AC/DC) consists of the PMU, PSUs (AC/DC) and power subrack (AC/DC).
Figure 4-50 shows the power equipment (AC/DC).
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-69
Figure 4-50 Power equipment (AC/DC)
(1) PMU (2) PSUs (AC/DC) (3) Power subrack (AC/DC)
Table 4-64 describes the components of the power equipment (AC/DC).
Table 4-64 Components of the power equipment (AC/DC)
Component Description
PMU For details, see 4.12.2 PMU.
PSU (AC/DC) For details, see 4.12.3 PSU (AC/DC).
Power subrack (AC/DC) For details, see 4.12.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC).
4.12.2 PMUThe Power and Environment Monitoring Unit (PMU) performs the power system management,power distribution detection, and alarm reporting functions.
Exterior
Figure 4-51 shows the PMU.
Figure 4-51 PMU
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
FunctionsThe PMU performs the following functions:
l Communicates with the BBU or upper-level PMU through an RS232/RS422 serial port.l Manages the power system and battery charge/discharge.l Detects and reports water damage alarms, smoke alarms, door status alarms, and
customized Boolean values.l Reports the ambient temperature, ambient humidity, battery temperature, and customized
analog values.l Monitors power distribution, reports related alarms, and reports dry contact alarms.
Ports and LEDsFigure 4-52 shows the front panel of the PMU.
Figure 4-52 Front panel of the PMU
(1) RS232/RS422 ports (2) LEDs (3) Power supply test ports
(4) TEST port (5) Battery control switch (6) COM port
Table 4-65 describes the ports and switch on the PMU.
Table 4-65 Ports and switch on the PMU
Port/Switch Function
RS232/RS422 port Communicating with the BBU or upper-level PMU
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-71
Port/Switch Function
Power supply test port Measuring the power voltage by using a multimeter through the-48V/+24V and 0V ports
TEST port Testing
Battery control switch Controlling the connection of the batteries through the ON and OFFportsl Press and hold the ON port for 5s to 10s to connect to the
batteries.l Press and hold the OFF port for 5s to 10s to disconnect the
batteries.CAUTIONl You must insert a small round bar into the hole when you operate the
battery control switch. When you hear a crack, the batteries are connectedor disconnected.
COM port Reserved for connecting to the external signal monitoring board
Table 4-66 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PMU.
Table 4-66 LEDs on the panel of the PMU
Label Color Status Description
RUN Green Blinking (on for 1s andoff for 1s)
The unit is functional, and thecommunication with the BBU or upper-levelPMU is normal.
Blinking (on for 0.125sand off for 0.125s)
The unit is functional, but the communicationwith the BBU or upper-level PMU fails. Ifthe unit does not communicate with the BBUor upper-level PMU for one minute, thecommunication is regarded as failed.
On or off The unit is faulty or the unit is in power-onself-check state.
ALM Red On The base station reports at least one of thefollowing alarms:l Mains overvoltage or undervoltage alarml Busbar overvoltage or undervoltage
alarml Alarm related to PSUsl Load disconnection alarm
Off No alarm is reported.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
NOTE
In 3s to 5s after the PMU is powered on, the ALM and RUN LEDs are simultaneously on for about 3s.
DIP SwitchThe DIP switch, which is used to choose monitoring address, is positioned on the right panel ofthe PMU. The DIP switch has eight bits, which are set before the PMU is delivered, as shownin Figure 4-53.
Figure 4-53 Right panel of the PMU
4.12.3 PSU (AC/DC)The PSU is a power supply unit. The PSU (AC/DC) converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DCpower.
PanelFigure 4-54 shows the panel of the PSU (AC/DC).
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-73
Figure 4-54 Panel of the PSU (AC/DC)
(1) Power LED (2) Protection LED (3) Fault LED
Functions
The PSU (AC/DC) performs the following functions:
l Converts 220 V AC power into -48 V DC power and supplies -48 V DC power to theDCDU-01.
l Monitors the unit and reports alarms related to PSU faults (such as output overvoltage, nooutput, and fan faults), alarms related to PSU protection (such as overtemperatureprotection, and input overvoltage/undervoltage protection), and PSU out-of-position alarm,if any.
LEDs
Table 4-67 describes the LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC).
Table 4-67 LEDs on the panel of the PSU (AC/DC)
LED Color Status Description
Power LED Green On The power supply isnormal.
Off There are faults (suchas no AC input, orovervoltage andundervoltage of ACinput) on the mains,or the PSU has nooutput.
Protection LED Yellow Off The running status isnormal.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
LED Color Status Description
On There is a pre-alarmrelating totemperature or thefan.
Fault LED Red Off The PSU is normal,or the PSU has nooutput because offaults (such as no ACinput, or overvoltageand undervoltage ofAC input) on themains.
On There is no outputbecause of outputovervoltageshutdown, the fanfault,overtemperatureshutdown, remoteshutdown, or aninternal PSU fault.
4.12.4 Power Subrack (AC/DC)The power subrack (AC/DC) provides the power input wiring terminals, wiring terminals forbatteries, and battery power output wiring terminal. The terminals are used for the connectionsof the input power cables, output power cables, and power cable for the batteries respectively.
PanelFigure 4-55 shows the panel of the power subrack (AC/DC).
BTS3900Hardware Description 4 BTS3900 Components
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
4-75
Figure 4-55 Panel of the power subrack (AC/DC)
(1) Power input wiring terminals (2) Power switch of the batteries
(3) Wiring terminals for batteries (4) Power output wiring terminals
PortsTable 4-68 describes the terminals and switch on the power subrack (AC/DC).
Table 4-68 Terminals and switch on the power subrack (AC/DC)
Terminal/Switch Description
Power input wiring terminals These terminals are used for the connections ofthe AC input power cables.
Power output wiring terminals The LOAD1(-) and LOAD2(-) wiringterminals are used for the connections of the-48 V power cables, and the RTN(+) wiringterminals are used for the connections of the-48 V RTN cables.
Wiring terminals for batteries The BAT(-) wiring terminal is used for theconnection of negative pole for the batteries,and the BAT(+) wiring terminal is used for theconnection of positive pole for the batteries.
Power switch of the batteries The power switch controls the connection ofthe batteries.
4 BTS3900 ComponentsBTS3900
Hardware Description
4-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5 BTS3900 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the BTS3900 cables. The BTS3900 cables consist of the PGND cable,power cable, transmission cable, CPRI cable, signal cable, and RF cable.
NOTE
The colors of cables vary according to the countries and areas where Huawei products are delivered. Ifcables are purchased at local market, the colors of the cables must comply with the rules and regulations.
5.1 List of BTS3900 CablesThis describes the BTS3900 cables, which are the power cables, PGND cables, transmissioncables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
5.2 BTS3900 Cable ConnectionsThe cable connections in the BTS3900 vary according to the power supply scenarios andconfigurations related to the cabinet, transmission system, CPRI port, and RF.
5.3 PGND CablesThe PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in thecabinet.
5.4 Equipotential CableWhen the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be groundedthrough connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.
5.5 BTS3900 Power CableThe BTS3900 power cables consist of the cables leading power to the BTS3900 cabinet,BBU3900, DCDU-01, fan box, RFU, and transmission equipment.
5.6 BTS3900 Transmission CableThe BTS3900 transmission cables are the E1 cable, E1 surge protection transfer cable, FE cable,FE surge protection transfer cable, and CPRI electrical cable.
5.7 CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and theRFU.
5.8 BTS3900 Signal Cable
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-1
The BTS3900 signal cables are the monitoring signal cable for the DCDU, monitoring signalcable for the PMU, monitoring signal cable for the PSU, in-position signal cable for the PSU,monitoring signal cable for the FAN unit, BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
5.9 BTS3900 RF CableThe BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5.1 List of BTS3900 CablesThis describes the BTS3900 cables, which are the power cables, PGND cables, transmissioncables, CPRI electrical cables, signal cables, and RF cables.
Power Cables and PGND CablesTable 5-1 lists the power cables and PGND cables.
Table 5-1 Power Cables and PGND Cables
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cables to beinstalled onsite
5.3 PGNDCables(PGNDcable for thecabinet)
OT terminal The mainPGNDterminalinside thecabinet
OT terminal Externalgroundingbar
5.4Equipotential Cable
OT terminal Wiringterminal fortheequipotentialcable
OT terminal Wiringterminal fortheequipotentialcable
5.5.1 InputPowerCable forthe Cabinet(-48 V powercable)
OT terminal NEG(-) andRTN(+) ontheDCDU-01
OT terminal Externalpowersupplydevice
5.5.1 InputPowerCable forthe Cabinet(+24 Vpower cable)
OT terminal Power inputwiringterminals ofthe powersubrack(DC/DC)
OT terminal Externalpowersupplydevice
5.5.1 InputPowerCable forthe Cabinet(AC powercable)
OT terminal Power inputwiringterminals ofthe powersubrack(AC/DC)
OT terminal Externalpowersupplydevice
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-3
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery
5.3 PGNDCables(PGNDcable for themodules)
OT terminal PGNDterminals ofthe modules
OT terminal PGNDterminalsinside thecabinet.
5.5.5 PowerCable forthe RFU
3V3 powerconnector
PWR port onthe RFU
Parallelterminal
Ports RFU0to RFU5 ontheDCDU-01
5.5.4 PowerCable forthe Fan Box
3V3 powerconnector
-48 V port ofthe fan box
Parallelterminal
FAN port ontheDCDU-01
5.5.3 PowerCable forthe BBU
3V3 powerconnector
PWR port onthe UPEU
Parallelterminal
BBU port ontheDCDU-01
5.5.2 PowerCable fortheDCDU-01(Black)
OT terminal RTN(+) porton theDCDU-01
OT terminal RTN(+)wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack(DC/DC)
5.5.2 PowerCable fortheDCDU-01(Blue)
OT terminal NEG(-) porton theDCDU-01
OT terminal LOAD(-)wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack(DC/DC)
5.5.2 PowerCable fortheDCDU-01(Black)
OT terminal RTN(+) porton theDCDU-01
OT terminal RTN(+)wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack(AC/DC)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
5.5.2 PowerCable fortheDCDU-01(Blue)
OT terminal NEG(-) porton theDCDU-01
OT terminal LOAD1(-)or LOAD2(-) wiringterminal forpower outputof the powersubrack(AC/DC)
Transmission CablesTable 5-2 lists the transmission cables.
Table 5-2 Transmission Cables
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cables to beinstalled onsite
5.6.1 E1/T1Cable
DB26 maleconnector
E1/T1 porton theGTMU orWMPT orUTRP
None Externaltransmissionequipment
5.6.2 FE/GECable
RJ-45 FE0 or FE1port on theGTMU orWMPT orLMPT orUTRP
RJ-45 Externaltransmissionequipment
5.6.3 FE/GEOpticalCable
LCconnector
SFP0 orSFP1 port onthe GTMUor WMPT orUTRP
l FCconnector
l SCconnector
l LCconnector
Externaltransmissionequipment
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-5
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery
5.6.4 CableBetweenTwo FEElectricalPorts
RJ-45 FE0 port onthe GTMU
RJ-45 FE0 port onthe WMPT
5.6.5 CableBetweenTwo FEOpticalPorts
LCconnector
FE1 port onthe GTMU
LCconnector
FE1 port onthe WMPT
CPRI CablesTable 5-3 lists the CPRI Cables.
Table 5-3 CPRI Cables
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery
5.7 CPRIElectricalCable
SFP200 maleconnector
CPRI portson theGTMU orWBBP orLBBP
SFP200 maleconnector
CPRI portson the RFU
Cables to beinstalled onsite
The BTS3900 cabinet is delivered with boards installed, and the CPRI cablesin the cabinet are already installed. The CPRI cables between multiplecabinets may be need to be installed on site according to the configuration.
Signal CablesTable 5-4 lists the signal cables.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-4 Signal Cables
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
Cables to beinstalled onsite
5.8.6MonitoringSignalCable forthe EMU
RJ-45connector
RS485 porton the EMU
RJ-45connector
MON1 porton the UPEUor UEIU
5.8.8 BBUAlarmCable
RJ-45connector
EXT-ALM0port on theUPEU orUEIU
RJ-45connector
Externalalarm device
5.8.9 GPSClockSignalCable
SMA maleconnector
GPS port onthe USCU
N-typefemaleconnector
GPS surgeprotector
Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery
5.8.1MonitoringSignalCable forthe PMU
RJ-45connector
Left RS232/RS422 porton PMU
RJ-45connector
MON1 porton the UPEU
5.8.2MonitoringSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)
RJ-45connector
ALM port onthe powersubrack (DC/DC)
Cord endterminal
EXT-ALM0port on theUPEU
5.8.3 In-PositionSignalCable forthe PSU(DC/DC)
RJ-45connector
PRESENTport on thepowersubrack (DC/DC)
RJ-45connector
EXT-ALM1port on theUPEU orUEIU
5.8.4MonitoringSignalCable forthe Fan Box
RJ-45connector
COM INport on thefan box
RJ-45connector
MON0 porton the UPEU
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-7
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector Installation Position
5.8.5 FanBoxCascadeSignalCable
RJ-45connector
COM OUTport on theupper-levelfan boxNOTE
Upper-levelfan box: thefan boxdirectlyconnected tothe BBU.
RJ-45connector
COM INport on thelower-levelfan boxNOTE
Lower-levelfan box: thefan boxconnected tothe upper-level fan boxand then tothe BBU.
5.8.10SignalCable forthe ELU
RJ-45connector
ELU RJ-45connector
SENSOR onthe fan box
RF CablesTable 5-5 lists the RF cables.
Table 5-5 RF Cables
Item Cable One End The Other End
Connector Installation Position
Connector InstallationPosition
Cables to beinstalled onsite
5.9.1 RFJumper
DIN elbowmaleconnector
RF ports onthe RFU
DIN straightmaleconnector
Antennasystem
Cablesinstalledbeforedelivery
5.9.2 Inter-RFU RFSignalCable
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX OUTport on oneRFU panel
QMA elbowmaleconnector
RX IN porton anotherRFU panel
5.2 BTS3900 Cable ConnectionsThe cable connections in the BTS3900 vary according to the power supply scenarios andconfigurations related to the cabinet, transmission system, CPRI port, and RF.
5.2.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5.2.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe base station supports the GSM only, UMTS only, LTE only, GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE,and UMTS+LTE modes. In different modes, board configurations and transmission cableconnections are different.
5.2.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cables are connected in star topology or chain topology. In star topology, each RFUis connected to the BBU separately. In chain topology, the RFUs are cascaded before connectedto the BBU.
5.2.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThe monitoring signal cable connections vary according to the BTS3900 cabinet type. The cableconnections are also affected by the number of UPEUs and UEIUs configured in the BBU.
5.2.5 RF Cable ConnectionsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, and MRFUs. The RFcable connections vary according to RFU types.
5.2.1 Power Cable ConnectionsThis section describes the power cable connections of the BTS3900 cabinet.
Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V)Figure 5-1 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V).
Figure 5-1 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V)
Table 5-6 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 (-48 V).
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-9
Table 5-6 Power cables of the BTS3900 (-48 V)
SN Description
P1 to P6 For details, see 5.5.5 Power Cable for the RFU.
P7 For details, see 5.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan Box.
P8 For details, see 5.5.3 Power Cable for the BBU.
P11, P12 For details, see 5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.
Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V)Figure 5-2 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V).
Figure 5-2 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V)
Table 5-7 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 (+24 V).
Table 5-7 Power cables of the BTS3900 (+24 V)
SN Description
P1 to P6 For details, see 5.5.5 Power Cable for the RFU.
P7 For details, see 5.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan Box.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SN Description
P8 For details, see 5.5.3 Power Cable for the BBU.
P11, P12 For details, see 5.5.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01.
P25 to P28 For details, see 5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.
Power Cable Connections of the BTS3900 (220 V)
The BTS3900 supports 220 V AC three-phase, 220 V AC single-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire power supplies. The following description takes the 220 V AC three-phase powersupply as an example.
Figure 5-3 shows the power cable connections of the BTS3900 (220 V).
Figure 5-3 Power cable connections of the BTS3900 (220 V)
Table 5-8 lists the power cables of the BTS3900 (220 V).
Table 5-8 Power cables of the BTS3900 (220 V)
SN Description
P1 to P6 For details, see 5.5.5 Power Cable for the RFU.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-11
SN Description
P7 For details, see 5.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan Box.
P8 For details, see 5.5.3 Power Cable for the BBU.
P11, P12 For details, see 5.5.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01.
L, N For details, see 5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the Cabinet.
5.2.2 Transmission Cable ConnectionsThe base station supports the GSM only, UMTS only, LTE only, GSM+UMTS, GSM+LTE,and UMTS+LTE modes. In different modes, board configurations and transmission cableconnections are different.
Transmission Cable Connections in the GSM Only Base StationIn a GSM base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 CableFigure 5-4 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where only the GTMU is configured as the transmissionboard in the BBU3900.
Figure 5-4 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 5-9 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-9 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 5-5 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a GSM only base station where the GTMU and UTRP4 are configured astransmission boards in the BBU3900.
Figure 5-5 E1/T1 cable connections
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-10 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-10 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Transmission over the FE CableFigure 5-6 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cable is usedfor data transmission.
Figure 5-6 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Table 5-11 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-11 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-7 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cable is used fordata transmission.
Figure 5-7 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 5-12 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-12 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-13
Transmission Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station
In a UMTS base station, the E1/T1 cable, FE/GE Ethernet cable, or FE/GE optical cable can beused for data transmission.
Transmission over the E1 Cable
Figure 5-8 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 5-8 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Table 5-13 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-13 E1/T1 cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 5-9 shows the transmission cable connections when only the E1/T1 cable is used for datatransmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP3/UTRP4 is configured in theBBU.
Figure 5-9 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Table 5-14 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-14 E1/T1 cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Transmission over the FE CableFigure 5-10 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 5-10 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Table 5-15 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-15 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-11 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE Ethernet cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP9 is configured inthe BBU.
Figure 5-11 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Table 5-16 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-16 FE/GE Ethernet cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-12 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT is configured in the BBU.
Figure 5-12 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-15
Table 5-17 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-17 FE/GE optical cable connections (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 5-13 shows the transmission cable connections when only the FE/GE optical cable isused for data transmission in a base station where only the WMPT and UTRP2 is configured inthe BBU.
Figure 5-13 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Table 5-18 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-18 FE/GE optical cable connections (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Transmission Cable Connections in the LTE Only Base StationIn an LTE only base station, the E1/T1 cable or FE/GE optical cable can be used for datatransmission.
Transmission over the E1/T1 CableWhen the E1/T1 cable is used for data transmission, the UTRP is required. Figure 5-14 showsthe transmission cable connections.
Figure 5-14 E1/T1 cable connections
Table 5-19 describes the cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-19 E1/T1 cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Transmission over the FE/GE CableWhen an LTE only base station uses FE/GE transmission, the FE/GE optical cable is usuallyused for data transmission. Figure 5-15 shows the transmission cable connections.
Figure 5-15 FE/GE optical cable connections
Table 5-20 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-20 FE/GE optical cable connections
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Transmission Cable Connections for a GSM+UMTS Base Station in CommonTransmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-transmission mode, TDM co-transmission or IPco-transmission can be used. Based on the IP co-transmission, the GSM+UMTS base stationcan implement route backup. That is, four FE ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels are used.Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type are used for interconnection, and the FE ports ofthe other type are connected to the transport network.
TDM Common TransmissionFigure 5-16 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GTMU serves as the shared port toconnect to the BSC and RNC. The GTMU communicates with the WMPT using the backplaneto implement TDM common transmission.
Figure 5-16 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-17
Table 5-21 describes the cable.
Table 5-21 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 5-17 shows the transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDMcommon transmission mode when the E1/T1 port on the GSM UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC. The GSM UTRP communicates with the WMPT using thebackplane to implement TDM common transmission.
NOTE
Note that the E1/T1 ports on the GTMU and the WMPT can also be used for data transmission independently,but the corresponding cable connections are not shown here.
Figure 5-17 Transmission cable connection for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM commontransmission mode (2)
Table 5-22 describes the cable.
Table 5-22 Transmission cable for a GSM+UMTS base station in TDM common transmissionmode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 5-18 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the E1/F1 port on the UMTS UTRP serves as the shared portto connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE electrical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
NOTE
IP common transmission can also be implemented by interconnecting the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMUand the WMPT. The transmission cable connections are similar to Figure 5-18, which are not described here.
Figure 5-18 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-23 describes the cables.
Table 5-23 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 5-19 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IPcommon transmission mode when the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT serves as the sharedport to connect to the BSC and RNC, and the FE/GE optical ports on the GTMU and the WMPTare interconnected to implement IP common transmission.
Figure 5-19 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 5-24 describes the cables.
Table 5-24 Transmission cables for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
IP Over FE Common TransmissionFigure 5-20 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the FE/GE optical port of the UMTS UTRP2 is used as the shared portsfor data transmission, and the FE/GE optical ports of the GTMU and the UMTS UTRP2 areinterconnected to implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 5-20 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-19
Table 5-25 describes the cables.
Table 5-25 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 5-21 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP co-transmission mode when the WMPT FE/GE optical port is used as the shared port for datatransmission, and the FE/GE electrical ports of the GTMU and the WMPT are interconnectedto implement IP co-transmission.
Figure 5-21 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
Table 5-26 describes the cables.
Table 5-26 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in IP over FEcommon transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing characteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and WMPT are connected to the BSC and RNCrespectively using the active channel.
l The GTMU and the WMPT are interconnected using FE ports on their panels.
l If the active channel is faulty, the standby channel takes over. After the active channel isrestored, the route is switched back to the active one.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l The bandwidth required by UMTS services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the standby channel is used, the Qualityof Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+UMTS base station, the route backup mode with IP common transmission has thefollowing limitations:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
common transmission.l The route backup mode is not applicable to the ports on the UTRPs for GSM or UMTS
transmission. It is applicable only to the ports on the GTMU and WMPT panels.l In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and WMPT panels are
interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connected to the BSCand the RNC.
Figure 5-22 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and WMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSC andRNC.
Figure 5-22 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
Table 5-27 describes the cables.
Table 5-27 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 5-23 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+UMTS base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andWMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the BSCand RNC.
Figure 5-23 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the BSC and RNC
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-21
Table 5-28 describes the cables.
Table 5-28 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the BSC and RNC
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Transmission Cable Connections in a GSM+UMTS Base Station in SeparateTransmission Mode
When a GSM+UMTS base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transmissionlinks can be configured for the GSM side and UMTS side. This section describes only two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+UMTS E1/T1Figure 5-24 shows the transmission cable connections when the E1/T1 cables are used for datatransmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station works inseparate transmission mode.
Figure 5-24 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode
Table 5-29 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-29 E1/T1 cable connections in separate transmission mode
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
GSM FE/GE+UMTS FE/GEFigure 5-25 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE Ethernet cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 5-25 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-30 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-30 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-26 shows the transmission cable connections when the FE/GE optical cables are usedfor data transmission on both the GSM and UMTS sides when a GSM+UMTS base station worksin separate transmission mode.
Figure 5-26 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)
Table 5-31 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-31 FE/GE cable connections in separate transmission mode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Transmission Cable Connections in the GSM+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A GSM+LTE base station implements IP over E1 and IP over FE/GE co-transmission based onthe interconnection between the FE ports (optical or electrical type) on the GTMU and LMPTpanels. Based on the co-transmission, route backup can be implemented. That is, four FE portson the GTMU and LMPT panels are used. Of the four FE ports, two FE ports of one type areused for interconnection, and the FE ports of the other type are connected to the transportnetwork.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 5-27 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 5-27 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-23
Table 5-32 describes the cables.
Table 5-32 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 5-28 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Figure 5-28 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
Table 5-33 describes the cables.
Table 5-33 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common TransmissionFigure 5-29 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the GTMU.
Figure 5-29 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-34 describes the cables.
Table 5-34 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 5-30 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the GTMU.
Figure 5-30 Transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode
Table 5-35 describes the cables.
Table 5-35 Transmission cables for a GSM+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In a GSM+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The GTMU and LMPT are connected to the transport networkthrough the primary channel.
l The GTMU and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-25
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theGSM standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a GSM+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for GSM
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the GTMU and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the GTMU and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.
Figure 5-31 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the GTMU andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to the basestation controller.
Figure 5-31 Transmission cable connections with FE electrical ports for interconnection andFE optical ports connected to the base station controller
Table 5-36 describes the cables.
Table 5-36 Transmission cables with FE electrical ports for interconnection and FE optical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
FE Optical Ports for Interconnection and FE Electrical Ports Connected to the BSCand RNC
Figure 5-32 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the GTMU and LMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the base stationcontroller.
Figure 5-32 Transmission cable connections with FE optical ports for interconnection and FEelectrical ports connected to the base station controller
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-37 describes the cables.
Table 5-37 Transmission cables with FE optical ports for interconnection and FE electrical portsconnected to the base station controller
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Transmission Cable Connections in the GSM+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission Mode
When a GSM+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the GSM side and LTE side. This section describes two typical mannersof the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
GSM E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
Figure 5-33 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-33 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 5-38 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-38 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-34 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU is used for data transmission on the GSMside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-27
Figure 5-34 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 5-39 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-39 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T2 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 5-35 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE electrical port isused for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-35 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 5-40 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-40 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-36 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the GTMU and the E1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s)on the UTRP are used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical port is usedfor data transmission on the LTE side.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-36 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 5-41 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-41 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE
Figure 5-37 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE electrical ports are used for data transmission on both theGSM and LTE sides.
Figure 5-37 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Table 5-42 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-42 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-38 shows the transmission cable connections for a GSM+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the GSM side and the FE/GE optical portis used for data transmission on the LTE side.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-29
Figure 5-38 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Table 5-43 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-43 Transmission cable connections in a base station in GSM FE/GE+LTE FE/GE mode(2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T2 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Transmission Cable Connection in the UMTS+LTE Base Station in Co-Transmission Mode
A UMTS+LTE base station implements IP co-transmission based on the interconnectionbetween the FE ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels. Based on the co-transmission, routebackup and hybrid transmission can be implemented.
IP Over E1 Common TransmissionFigure 5-39 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GE opticalport on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 5-39 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (1)
Table 5-44 describes the cables.
Table 5-44 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SN Description
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Figure 5-40 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port on the LTE UTRP is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 5-40 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1common transmission mode (2)
Table 5-45 describes the cables.
Table 5-45 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over E1 commontransmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
IP Over FE/GE Common Transmission
Figure 5-41 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE optical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEelectrical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE electrical port on the WMPT.
Figure 5-41 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode (1)
Table 5-46 describes the cables.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-31
Table 5-46 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
Figure 5-42 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port on the LMPT is connected to the transmission equipment and the FE/GEoptical port on the LMPT is interconnected to the FE/GE optical port on the WMPT.
Figure 5-42 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GEcommon transmission mode
Table 5-47 describes the cables.
Table 5-47 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in IP over FE/GE commontransmission mode
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Route Backup Mode with IP Common Transmission
In route backup mode, the FE ports of one type (either optical or electrical ports) on the WMPTand LMPT are interconnected, and the FE ports of the other type (either optical or electricalports) on the two boards are connected to the transmission equipment.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the route backup transmission mode has the followingcharacteristics:
l IP transmission is applied. The WMPT and LMPT are connected to the transport networkthrough the primary channel.
l The WMPT and the LMPT are interconnected through FE ports on their panels.
l If the primary channel is faulty, the secondary channel takes over. After the primary channelis restored, the route is switched back to the primary one.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
l The bandwidth required by LTE services is larger than the processing capability of theUMTS standard transport network. Therefore, when the secondary channel is used, theQuality of Service (QoS) of only high-priority data flows can be guaranteed.
In a UMTS+LTE base station, the following limitations on the route backup transmission modeapply:l The route backup function is not applicable when the base station uses the IP over E1
transmission.l The route backup transmission mode is not applicable on the ports on the UTRPs for UMTS
and LTE transmission. It is applicable only on the ports on the WMPT and LMPT panels.l In route backup transmission mode, the FE ports of one type on the WMPT and LMPT
panels are interconnected. The FE ports of the other type on the two boards are connectedto the transport network.
Figure 5-43 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE electrical ports on the WMPT andLMPT are interconnected and the FE optical ports on the two boards are connected to thetransmission equipment.
Figure 5-43 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (1)
Table 5-48 describes the cables.
Table 5-48 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (1)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 5-44 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in routebackup mode with IP common transmission when the FE optical ports on the WMPT and LMPTare interconnected and the FE electrical ports on the two boards are connected to the transmissionequipment.
Figure 5-44 Transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backupmode with IP common transmission (2)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-33
Table 5-49 describes the cables.
Table 5-49 Transmission cables for a UMTS+LTE base station in route backup mode with IPcommon transmission (2)
SN Description
T1 and T2 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Hybrid Transmission
In hybrid transmission mode, the UMTS E1/T1 port and LTE FE/GE port serve as shared portsto connect to the transmission equipment. The E1/T1 port is used to transmit the services withhigh QoS requirements, such as CS services; and the FE/GE port is used to transmit the serviceswith low QoS requirements, such as PS services.
The UMTS E1/T1 port and the LTE FE/GE port are used for data transmission in a UMTS+LTEbase station in hybrid transmission mode. When the UMTS FE/GE port and the LTE FE/GEport are used for data transmission, hybrid transmission is not applicable.
Figure 5-45 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE optical port).
Figure 5-45 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (1)
Table 5-50 describes the cables.
Table 5-50 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (1)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.4 Cable Between Two FEElectrical Ports.
Figure 5-46 shows the transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (UMTS E1/T1 port + LTE FE/GE electrical port).
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-46 Transmission cable connections in hybrid transmission mode (2)
Table 5-51 describes the cables.
Table 5-51 Transmission cables in hybrid transmission mode (2)
SN Description
T1 For details, see 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
T2 For details, see 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 For details, see 5.6.5 Cable Between Two FEOptical Ports.
Transmission Cable Connection in the UMTS+LTE Base Station in SeparateTransmission Mode
When a UMTS+LTE base station works in separate transmission mode, separate transport linkscan be configured for the UMTS side and the LTE side. This section describes two typicalmanners of the transmission cable connections in separate transmission mode.
UMTS E1/T1+LTE FE/GE
Figure 5-47 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-47 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 5-52 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-52 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-35
Cable Number Cable Description
T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 5-48 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing four E1s/T1s) on the WMPT is used for data transmission on the UMTSside and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-48 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 5-53 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-53 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 4E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
Figure 5-49 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-49 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 5-54 describes the cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Table 5-54 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-50 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theE1/T1 port (providing eight E1s/T1s) on the UTRP3 or UTRP4 is used for data transmission onthe UMTS side and the FE/GE optical port is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-50 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 5-55 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-55 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS 8E1/T1+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.1 E1/T1 Cable.
T3 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEFigure 5-51 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station in separatetransmission mode when the FE/GE ports are used for data transmission on both the UMTS andLTE sides.
Figure 5-51 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Table 5-56 describes the cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-37
Table 5-56 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (1)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 and T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
Figure 5-52 shows the transmission cable connections for a UMTS+LTE base station when theFE/GE electrical port is used for data transmission on the UMTS side and the FE/GE opticalport is used for data transmission on the LTE side.
Figure 5-52 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Table 5-57 describes the cable connections.
Table 5-57 Transmission cable connections in a base station in UMTS FE/GE+LTE FE/GEmode (2)
Cable Number Cable Description
T1 See 5.6.3 FE/GE Optical Cable.
T2 See 5.6.2 FE/GE Cable.
5.2.3 CPRI Cable ConnectionsThe CPRI cables are connected in star topology or chain topology. In star topology, each RFUis connected to the BBU separately. In chain topology, the RFUs are cascaded before connectedto the BBU.
CPRI Cable Connections for a GSM Only Base StationFigure 5-53 and Figure 5-54 show the CPRI cable connections of the DRFU/GRFU.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-53 Star topology
Figure 5-54 Chain topology
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS Only Base Station
Figure 5-55 shows the star topology of the WRFUs over CPRI ports when the WRFUs work insingle-band mode and support not more than three sectors in a base station with MIMO notsupported.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-39
Figure 5-55 Star topology over CPRI ports
When the WRFUs work in single-band mode and support not more than three sectors (twoWRFUs for each sector) in a base station with MIMO supported, or when the bandwidth andcarriers are expanded, the CPRI ports are connected in chain topology, as shown in Figure5-56 and Figure 5-57.
Figure 5-56 Chain topology over CPRI ports
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-57 Chain topology over CPRI ports on the WBBPd
CPRI Cable Connections in the LTE Only Base Station
Figure 5-58 shows the CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 2T2R configuration.
Figure 5-58 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 2T2R configuration
Figure 5-59 shows the CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 2T2R configuration.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-41
Figure 5-59 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 2T2R configuration
Figure 5-60 shows the CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 4T4R configuration.
Figure 5-60 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 10 MHz 4T4R configuration
Figure 5-61 shows the CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 4T4R configuration.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-61 CPRI cable connections in the 3 x 20 MHz 4T4R configuration
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+UMTS Base Station
CPRI Cable Connections in the Co-Module GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen the MRFUs support not more than three sectors, one WBBPb is configured. When theMRFUs support more than three sectors, two WBBPbs or one WBBPd are configured.
When the MRFUs work in single-band mode and support three sectors, the CPRI ports areconnected in dual-star topology, as shown in Figure 5-62 and Figure 5-63.
Figure 5-62 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-43
Figure 5-63 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (2)
When the MRFUs work in single-band mode and support more than three sectors, the CPRIports are connected in dual-star topology, as shown in Figure 5-64 and Figure 5-65.
Figure 5-64 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (3)
Figure 5-65 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports (4)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
CPRI Cable Connections in the Co-Cabinet GSM+UMTS Base StationWhen a GSM+UMTS base station works in co-cabinet mode, the base station supports amaximum of 12 RFUs.
Figure 5-66 and Figure 5-67 show the CPRI cable connections in a base station in co-cabinetmode.
Figure 5-66 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with WRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs (1)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-45
Figure 5-67 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with WRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs (2)
When the MRFUs work in dual-mode and support three sectors and when the WRFU supportthree sectors in a base station with MIMO not supported, the CPRI cables are connected in themanner shown in Figure 5-68.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-68 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and WRFUs (1)
When the MRFUs work in dual-mode and support three sectors and when the WRFU supportthree sectors in a base station with MIMO supported, the CPRI cables are connected in themanner shown in Figure 5-69.
Figure 5-69 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and WRFUs (2)
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-47
When the MRFUs work in dual-mode and support three sectors, and the number of DRFUs/GRFUs is more than three, the UBRI is required. In this case, the CPRI cables are connected inthe manner shown in Figure 5-70.
Figure 5-70 CPRI cable connections in a co-cabinet base station with MRFUs and DRFUs/GRFUs
CPRI Cable Connections in the GSM+LTE Base Station
CPRI Cable Connections in the Co-Module GSM+LTE Base StationThe MRFUs working in GSM+LTE mode are connected in the dual-star topology, as shown inFigure 5-71.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-71 Dual-star topology over CPRI ports
CPRI Cable Connections in the Co-Cabinet GSM+UMTS Base Station
Figure 5-72 shows the CPRI cable connections in a base station in co-cabinet mode.
Figure 5-72 CPRI cable connections in co-cabinet mode
CPRI Cable Connections in the UMTS+LTE Base Station
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-49
The WRFUs and LRFUs in a UMTS+LTE base station use the same CPRI cable connection asthe RFUs in a UMTS only base station and LTE only base station respectively, as shown inFigure 5-73.
Figure 5-73 CPRI port connection principles
5.2.4 Monitoring Signal Cable ConnectionsThe monitoring signal cable connections vary according to the BTS3900 cabinet type. The cableconnections are also affected by the number of UPEUs and UEIUs configured in the BBU.
NOTE
If any device is not configured at the site, neglect the device and its cable connection.
Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC)The monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC) are shown in Figure5-74 and listed in Table 5-58.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-74 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC)
Table 5-58 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (-48 V DC)
Cable Number Cable Description
S1 and S2 See 5.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELU.
S3 See 5.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Box.
S4 See 5.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal Cable.
S5 See 5.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU.
S6 and S7 See 5.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM
Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC)The monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC) are shown in Figure5-75 and listed in Table 5-59.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-51
Figure 5-75 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC)
Table 5-59 Monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (+24 V DC)
Cable Number Cable Description
S1 and S2 See 5.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELU.
S3 See 5.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Box.
S4 See 5.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal Cable.
S5 See 5.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU.
S6 and S7 See 5.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM.
S8 See 5.8.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
S9 and S10 See 5.8.3 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Signal Cable Connections of the BTS3900 (AC)The monitoring signal cable connections of the BTS3900A (AC) are shown in Figure 5-76 andlisted in Table 5-60.
Figure 5-76 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (AC)
Table 5-60 Signal cable connections of the BTS3900 (AC)
Cable Number Cable Description
S1 and S2 See 5.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELU.
S3 See 5.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan Box.
S4 See 5.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal Cable.
S5 and S6 See 5.8.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMU.
S7 See 5.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU.
S8 and S9 See 5.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATM.
5.2.5 RF Cable ConnectionsThe RFUs configured in a base station can be DRFUs, GRFUs, WRFUs, and MRFUs. The RFcable connections vary according to RFU types.
RF Cable Connections for DRFUsThe DRFU supports two carriers.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-53
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for DRFUs with a single sector.
Cable Connections in 1T2R ModeWith one RX channel and two TX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 5-77 describes the RF cable connections.
Figure 5-77 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)
With one RX channel and two TX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 5-77 shows the RF cable connections.
With one RX channel and two TX channels, the following items are configured for four carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two DRFUsFigure 5-78 describes the RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-78 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)
Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two RX channels and two TX channels, the following items are configured for one carrier:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One DRFUFigure 5-77 shows the RF cable connections.
With two RX channels and two TX channels, the following items are configured for two carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two DRFUsFigure 5-78 shows the RF cable connections.
RF Cable Connections for GRFUsThe GRFU supports six carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for GRFUs with a single sector.
The GRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.
Cable Connections with Three CarriersThe following items are configured for three carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennas
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-55
l One GRFUFigure 5-79 describes the RF cable connections.
Figure 5-79 Cable connections with three carriers
Cable Connections with Nine CarriersThe following items are configured for nine carriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two GRFUsFigure 5-80 describes the RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-80 Cable Connections with Nine Carriers
Cable Connections with 14 CarriersThe following items are configured for 14 carriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Three GRFUsFigure 5-81 describes the RF cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-57
Figure 5-81 Cable connections with 14 carriers
Cable Connections with 24 CarriersThe following items are configured for 24 carriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Four GRFUsFigure 5-82 describes the RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-82 Cable connections with 24 carriers
RF Cable Connections for WRFUsThe WRFU supports four carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for WRFUs with a single sector.
Cable Connections in 1T2R ModeWith one RX channel and two TX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One WRFUFigure 5-83 describes the RF cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-59
Figure 5-83 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (1)
With one RX channel and two TX channels, the following items are configured for five to eightcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 5-84 describes the RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-84 Cable connections in 1T2R mode (2)
Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeWith two RX channels and two TX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 5-84 shows the RF cable connections.
Cable Connections in 2T4R ModeWith two RX channels and four TX channels, the following items are configured for one to fourcarriers:l Two pairs of dual-polarized antennasl Two WRFUsFigure 5-85 describes the RF cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-61
Figure 5-85 Cable connections in 2T4R mode
Cable Connections in 2x2 MIMO ModeThe base station in UMTS only mode supports 2x2 MIMO. Figure 5-84 shows the cableconnections.
RF Cable Connections for LRFUsThe LRFU supports a single carrier.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for LRFUs supporting a singlesector.
The LRFU supports only the 2T2R configuration.
RF Cable Connections in 2T2R ModeIn 2T2R mode, the following items are configured:l A dual-polarized antennal An LRFUFigure 5-86 shows RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-86 RF cable connections in 2T2R mode
RF Cable Connections in 4T4R modeIn 4T4R mode, the following items are configured:l Two dual-polarized antennasl Two LRFUsFigure 5-87 shows RF cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-63
Figure 5-87 RF cable connections in 4T4R mode
RF Cable Connections for MRFUsThe MRFU supports six carriers.
The following description is based on the RF cable connections for MRFUs with a single sector.
The MRFU supports only the 1T2R configuration.
Cable Connections in G3U1 ModeThe following items are configured for three carriers in GSM and one carrier in UMTS:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One MRFUFigure 5-88 describes the RF cable connections.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-88 Cable connections in G3U1 mode
Cable Connections in G9U1 ModeThe following items are configured for nine carriers in GSM and one carrier in UMTS:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two MRFUsFigure 5-89 describes the RF cable connections.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-65
Figure 5-89 Cable connections in G9U1 mode
Cable Connections in G2U2 ModeThe following items are configured for two carriers in GSM and two carriers in UMTS:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl One MRFUFigure 5-88 shows the RF cable connections.
Cable Connections in G6U2 ModeThe following items are configured for six carriers in GSM and two carriers in UMTS:l A pair of dual-polarized antennasl Two MRFUsFigure 5-89 shows the RF cable connections.
5.3 PGND CablesThe PGND cables are used to ensure proper grounding of the cabinet and the modules in thecabinet.
PGND Cable for the Cabinet
The PGND cable for the cabinet is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 25 mm2.Figure 5-90 shows the PGND cable for the cabinet.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-90 PGND cable for the cabinet
(1) OT terminal
PGND Cable for the Modules
The PGND cable for the modules is green and yellow with a cross-sectional area of 6 mm2.Figure 5-91 shows the PGND cable for the modules.
Figure 5-91 PGND cable for the modules
(1) OT terminal
5.4 Equipotential CableWhen the battery cabinet is working with the power cabinet, one cabinet should be groundedthrough connecting the equipotential cable to the other cabinet.
Structure
The equipotential cable is a single cable with OT terminals at both ends. It is a yellow and greencable with cross-sectional area of 16 mm2. The OT terminals should be made on site.
Figure 5-92 show the equipotential cable.
Figure 5-92 Equipotential cable
(1) OT terminals
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-67
5.5 BTS3900 Power CableThe BTS3900 power cables consist of the cables leading power to the BTS3900 cabinet,BBU3900, DCDU-01, fan box, RFU, and transmission equipment.
5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the CabinetThe input power cable for the cabinet feeds DC or AC power into the cabinet.
5.5.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01The power equipment (DC/DC) and power equipment (AC/DC) provide -48 V DC power to theDCDU-01 through the DCDU-01 power cable.
5.5.3 Power Cable for the BBUThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the BBU through the power cable for the BBU.
5.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan BoxThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the fan box through the power cable for the fan box.
5.5.5 Power Cable for the RFUThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the RFU through the power cable for the RFU.
5.5.6 Power Cable for the GATMThe power cable for the GATM feeds -48 V DC power into the GATM.
5.5.1 Input Power Cable for the CabinetThe input power cable for the cabinet feeds DC or AC power into the cabinet.
-48 V Power CableThe -48 V power cable feeds -48 V power into the cabinet. Figure 5-93 shows the -48 V powercable. Table 5-61 describes the -48 V power cable.
Figure 5-93 -48 V power cable
(1) OT terminal
Table 5-61 -48 V power cable
Cable Color Cross-SectionalArea
OT Aperture
-48 V power cable Blue 16 mm2 M6
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Cable Color Cross-SectionalArea
OT Aperture
Black
+24 V Power CableThe +24 V power cable feeds +24 V power into the cabinet. Figure 5-94 shows the +24 V powercable. Table 5-62 describes the +24 V power cable.
Figure 5-94 +24 V power cable
(1) OT terminal
Table 5-62 +24 V power cable
Cable Color Cross-SectionalArea
OT Aperture
+24 V power cable Red 25 mm2 M6
Black
NOTE
The +24 V power cable consists of two pairs of wires, with each pair containing a red wire and a blackwire.
AC Power CableThe BTS3900 cabinet supports three types of AC power supply. That is, the 220 V AC single-phase, 220 V AC three-phase, and 110 V AC dual-live-wire. The AC power cable feeds ACpower into a cabinet. Figure 5-95 shows the AC power cable. Table 5-63 describes the ACpower cable.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-69
Figure 5-95 AC power cable (220 V AC, single-phase)
(1) OT terminal
NOTE
Different types of 220 V power cable have different exteriors and consist of different numbers of wires.Figure 5-95 shows the 220 V AC single-phase power cable.
Table 5-63 220 V power cable
Cable Wire Cross-SectionalArea
OT Aperture
220 V AC three-phase power cable
L1 wire 2.5 mm2 M6
L2 wire
L3 wire
N wire
220 V AC single-phase power cable
L wire 6 mm2
N wire
110 V dual-live-wire power cable
L1 wire 6 mm2
L2 wire
NOTE
The colors and exteriors of cables delivered by Huawei vary according to countries and areas. If cables arepurchased at local markets, the cables must comply with the local rules and regulations.
5.5.2 Power Cable for the DCDU-01The power equipment (DC/DC) and power equipment (AC/DC) provide -48 V DC power to theDCDU-01 through the DCDU-01 power cable.
ExteriorFigure 5-96 shows the power cable for the DCDU-01.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-96 Power cable for the DCDU-01
(1) OT terminal
Cable DescriptionTable 5-64 describes the power cable for the DCDU-01.
Table 5-64 Power cable for the DCDU-01
Power Equipment Cable Color Cross-Sectional Area OT Aperture
Power equipment(DC/DC)
Blue 16 mm2 M6
Black
Power equipment(AC/DC)
Blue 16 mm2 M6
Black
5.5.3 Power Cable for the BBUThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the BBU through the power cable for the BBU.
ExteriorFigure 5-97 shows the power cable for the BBU.
Figure 5-97 Power cable for the BBU
(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Parallel terminal
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-71
Pin AssignmentTable 5-65 describes the pin assignment of the power cable for the BBU.
Table 5-65 Pin assignment of the power cable for the BBU
Cable X1 End X2 End Cable Color
W1 A3 B1 Black
W2 A1 B2 Blue
5.5.4 Power Cable for the Fan BoxThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the fan box through the power cable for the fan box.
ExteriorFigure 5-98 shows the power cable for the fan box.
Figure 5-98 Power cable for the fan box
(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Parallel terminal
Pin AssignmentTable 5-66 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan box.
Table 5-66 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the fan box
Cable X1 End X2 End Cable Color
W1 A3 B1 Black
W2 A1 B2 Blue
5.5.5 Power Cable for the RFUThe DCDU-01 feeds -48 V DC power into the RFU through the power cable for the RFU.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
ExteriorFigure 5-99 shows the power cable for the RFU.
Figure 5-99 Power cable for the RFU
(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Parallel terminal
Pin AssignmentTable 5-67 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the RFU.
Table 5-67 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the RFU
Cable X1 End X2 End Cable Color
W1 A3 B1 Black
W2 A1 B2 Blue
5.5.6 Power Cable for the GATMThe power cable for the GATM feeds -48 V DC power into the GATM.
StructureOne end of the power cable for the GATM is a parallel terminal, and the other end is a 3V3power connector. Figure 5-100 shows the power cable for the GATM.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-73
Figure 5-100 Power cable for the GATM
(1) 3V3 power connector (2) Parallel terminal
Pin AssignmentTable 5-68 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the GATM.
Table 5-68 Pin assignment for the wires of the power cable for the GATM
Wire X1 End X2 End Wire Color
W1 X1.A1 X2.B2 Blue
W2 X1.A3 X2.B1 Black
5.6 BTS3900 Transmission CableThe BTS3900 transmission cables are the E1 cable, E1 surge protection transfer cable, FE cable,FE surge protection transfer cable, and CPRI electrical cable.
5.6.1 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.
5.6.2 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.
5.6.3 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.
5.6.4 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5.6.5 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
5.6.1 E1/T1 CableThe E1/T1 cable connects the BBU to the external transmission device and transmits basebandsignals.
Exterior
The E1/T1 cables are classified into two types: 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable and 120-ohm E1 twistedpair cable.
One end of the E1/T1 cable is a DB26 male connector. The connector at the other end of thecable should be made on site according to site requirements. Figure 5-101 shows an E1/T1 cable.
Figure 5-101 E1/T1 cable
(1) DB26 male connector
Table 5-69 describes the connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable.
Table 5-69 Connectors of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Cable One End The other End
75-ohm E1 coaxial cable DB26 male connector L9 male connector
L9 female connector
SMB female connector
BNC male connector
SMZ male connector
SMZ female connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-70 and Table 5-71 describe the pin assignment for the wires of the E1/T1 cable.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-75
NOTE
In Table 5-70, "Tip" refers to a wire in the E1 coaxial cable, and "Ring" refers to an external conductor ofthe cable.
Table 5-70 Pin assignment for the wires of the 75-ohm E1 coaxial cable
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Type Coaxial Series No. Cable Label
X1.1 Tip 1 RX1+
X1.2 Ring RX1-
X1.3 Tip 3 RX2+
X1.4 Ring RX2-
X1.5 Tip 5 RX3+
X1.6 Ring RX3-
X1.7 Tip 7 RX4+
X1.8 Ring RX4-
X1.19 Tip 2 TX1+
X1.20 Ring TX1-
X1.21 Tip 4 TX2+
X1.22 Ring TX2-
X1.23 Tip 6 TX3+
X1.24 Ring TX3-
X1.25 Tip 8 TX4+
X1.26 Ring TX4-
Table 5-71 Pin assignment for the wires of the 120-ohm E1 twisted pair cable
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels
X.1 Blue Twisted pair RX1+
X.2 White RX1-
X.3 Orange Twisted pair RX2+
X.4 White RX2-
X.5 Green Twisted pair RX3+
X.6 White RX3-
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Pins of the DB26Male Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Cable Labels
X.7 Brown Twisted pair RX4+
X.8 White RX4-
X.19 Gray Twisted pair TX1+
X.20 White TX1-
X.21 Blue Twisted pair TX2+
X.22 Red TX2-
X.23 Orange Twisted pair TX3+
X.24 Red TX3-
X.25 Green Twisted pair TX4+
X.26 Red TX4-
5.6.2 FE/GE CableThe FE/GE cable connects the BBU to the transmission device through routing devices andtransmits baseband signals.
NOTEThe maximum length of the FE/GE cable for remote connection is 100 m.
Exterior
The FE/GE cable is a shielded straight-through cable. It has an RJ-45 connector at each end, asshown in Figure 5-102.
Figure 5-102 FE/GE cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-72 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-77
Table 5-72 Pin assignment for the wires of the FE/GE cable
Pin on the RJ-45Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Pin on the RJ-45 Connector
X1.2 Orange Twisted pair X2.2
X1.1 White andorange
X2.1
X1.6 Green Twisted pair X2.6
X1.3 White andgreen
X2.3
X1.4 Blue Twisted pair X2.4
X1.5 White and blue X2.5
X1.8 Brown Twisted pair X2.8
X1.7 White andbrown
X2.7
5.6.3 FE/GE Optical CableThe FE/GE optical cable is used to transmit optical signals between the BBU3900 and thetransmission device. This cable is optional.
Exterior
The FE/GE optical cable has an LC connector at one end and an FC connector, SC connector,or LC connector at the other end, as shown in Figure 5-103, Figure 5-104, and Figure 5-105respectively.
Figure 5-103 FE/GE optical cable (FC and LC connectors)
Figure 5-104 FE/GE optical cable (SC and LC connectors)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-105 FE/GE optical cable (LC and LC connectors)
CAUTIONWhen connecting the BBU3900 and the transmission device using the FE/GE optical cable,adhere to the following rules:
l The TX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the RX port on the transmission device.
l The RX port on the BBU3900 is connected to the TX port on the transmission device.
5.6.4 Cable Between Two FE Electrical PortsThe cable between two FE electrical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
Structure
The cable between two FE electrical ports has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown inFigure 5-106.
Figure 5-106 Cable between two FE electrical ports
(1) RJ-45 connector
5.6.5 Cable Between Two FE Optical PortsThe cable between two FE optical ports connects the GTMU and the WMPT to implement IPtransmission.
Structure
The cable between two FE optical ports has an LC connector at each end, as shown in Figure5-107.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-79
Figure 5-107 Cable between two FE optical ports
(1) LC connector
5.7 CPRI Electrical CableThe CPRI electrical cable enables high speed communication between the BBU3900 and theRFU.
ExteriorThe CPRI electrical cable is an SFP high speed transmission cable that has an SFP20 maleconnector at each end, as shown in Figure 5-108.
Figure 5-108 CPRI electrical cable
5.8 BTS3900 Signal CableThe BTS3900 signal cables are the monitoring signal cable for the DCDU, monitoring signalcable for the PMU, monitoring signal cable for the PSU, in-position signal cable for the PSU,monitoring signal cable for the FAN unit, BBU alarm cable, and GPS clock signal cable.
5.8.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMUThe monitoring signal cable for the PMU transmits the environment alarm information collectedby the PMU to the BBU.
5.8.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerstatus of the PSUs and receive related alarms.
5.8.3 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.
5.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan BoxThe monitoring signal cable for the fan box is used for the BBU to monitor the running statusof the fan box.
5.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal CableFan box cascade signal cable is used to connect two fan boxes.
5.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMU
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
The monitoring signal cable for the EMU transmits monitoring signals from the EMU to theBBU.
5.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATMThis cable connects the BBU and GATM, enabling the BBU to transmit control signals to theGATM and enabling the GATM to report alarms to the BBU.
5.8.8 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
5.8.9 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
5.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELUThe signal cable for the ELU is used to report the cabinet type information detected by the ELUto the fan box.
5.8.1 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PMUThe monitoring signal cable for the PMU transmits the environment alarm information collectedby the PMU to the BBU.
ExteriorFigure 5-109 shows the monitoring signal cable for the PMU.
Figure 5-109 Monitoring signal cable for the PMU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-73 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for thePMU.
Table 5-73 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the PMU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-81
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.8.2 Monitoring Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the powerstatus of the PSUs and receive related alarms.
ExteriorThe blue and white wires of the monitoring cable is used for monitoring the power status of thePSUs. The other wires are tied to the column of the cabinet. Figure 5-110 shows the monitoringsignal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
Figure 5-110 Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) Monitoring signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
5.8.3 In-Position Signal Cable for the PSU (DC/DC)The in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC) is used for the BBU to monitor the in-positionstatus of the PSU.
ExteriorFigure 5-111 shows the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC).
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-111 In-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-74 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU(DC/DC).
Table 5-74 Pin assignment for the wires of the in-position signal cable for the PSU (DC/DC)
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.8.4 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Fan BoxThe monitoring signal cable for the fan box is used for the BBU to monitor the running statusof the fan box.
ExteriorFigure 5-112 shows the monitoring signal cable for the fan box.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-83
Figure 5-112 Monitoring signal cable for the fan box
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-75 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fanbox.
Table 5-75 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the fan box
X1 End X2 End Color Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.8.5 Fan Box Cascade Signal CableFan box cascade signal cable is used to connect two fan boxes.
StructureFigure 5-113 shows the fan box cascade signal cable.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-113 Fan box cascade signal cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-76 describes the pin assignment of the fan box cascade signal cable.
Table 5-76 Pin assignment of the fan box cascade signal cable
X1 End X2 End Color Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair cable
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair cable
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair cable
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair cable
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.8.6 Monitoring Signal Cable for the EMUThe monitoring signal cable for the EMU transmits monitoring signals from the EMU to theBBU.
ExteriorFigure 5-114 shows the monitoring signal cable for the EMU.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-85
Figure 5-114 Monitoring signal cable for the EMU
(1) RJ-45 connector (2) DB9 male connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-77 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for theEMU.
Table 5-77 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the EMU
Pin on theRJ-45Connector
Pin on the DB9Male Connector
Wire Color Wire Type Label
X1.1 X2.3 White Twisted pair TX+
X1.2 X2.7 Orange TX-
X1.5 X2.6 White Twisted pair RX-
X1.4 X2.2 Blue RX+
5.8.7 Monitoring Signal Cable for the GATMThis cable connects the BBU and GATM, enabling the BBU to transmit control signals to theGATM and enabling the GATM to report alarms to the BBU.
StructureFigure 5-115 shows the monitoring signal cable for the GATM.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
Figure 5-115 Monitoring signal cable for the GATM
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-78 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for theGATM.
Table 5-78 Pin assignment for the wires of the monitoring signal cable for the GATM
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.8.8 BBU Alarm CableThe BBU alarm cable transmits alarm signals from an external alarm device to the BBU.
ExteriorThe BBU alarm cable has an RJ-45 connector at each end, as shown in Figure 5-116. However,an RJ-45 connector at one end may be removed, and an appropriate terminal may be addedaccording to the field requirements.
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-87
Figure 5-116 BBU alarm cable
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin Assignment
Table 5-79 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable.
Table 5-79 Pin assignment for the wires of the BBU alarm cable
BBUAlarmPort
Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd
WireColor
WireType
Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd
Description
EXT-ALM1
X1.1 White andorange
Twistedpair
X2.1 Boolean value input 4+
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 4-(GND)
X1.3 White andgreen
Twistedpair
X2.3 Boolean value input 5+
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 5-(GND)
X1.5 White andblue
Twistedpair
X2.5 Boolean value input 6+
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 6-(GND)
X1.7 White andbrown
Twistedpair
X2.7 Boolean value input 7+
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 7-(GND)
EXT-ALM0
X1.1 White andorange
Twistedpair
X2.1 Boolean value input 0+
X1.2 Orange X2.2 Boolean value input 0-(GND)
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
BBUAlarmPort
Pin on theRJ45Connector at OneEnd
WireColor
WireType
Pin on theRJ45Connector at theOtherEnd
Description
X1.3 White andgreen
Twistedpair
X2.3 Boolean value input 1+
X1.6 Green X2.6 Boolean value input 1-(GND)
X1.5 White andblue
Twistedpair
X2.5 Boolean value input 2+
X1.4 Blue X2.4 Boolean value input 2-(GND)
X1.7 White andbrown
Twistedpair
X2.7 Boolean value input 3+
X1.8 Brown X2.8 Boolean value input 3-(GND)
5.8.9 GPS Clock Signal CableThe GPS clock signal cable is an optional cable that transmits GPS clock signals from the GPSantenna system to the BBU. The GPS clock signals serve as the clock reference of the BBU.
Exterior
The GPS clock signal cable has an SMA male connector at one end and an N-type femaleconnector at the other end, as shown in Figure 5-117.
Figure 5-117 GPS clock signal cable
(1) SMA male connector (2) N-type female connector
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-89
5.8.10 Signal Cable for the ELUThe signal cable for the ELU is used to report the cabinet type information detected by the ELUto the fan box.
ExteriorFigure 5-118 shows the signal cable for the ELU.
Figure 5-118 Signal cable for the ELU
(1) RJ-45 connector
Pin AssignmentTable 5-80 describes the pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU.
Table 5-80 Pin assignment for the wires of the signal cable for the ELU
X1 End X2 End Wire Color Wire Type
X1.1 X2.1 White Twisted pair
X1.2 X2.2 Orange
X1.3 X2.3 White Twisted pair
X1.6 X2.6 Green
X1.5 X2.5 White Twisted pair
X1.4 X2.4 Blue
X1.7 X2.7 White Twisted pair
X1.8 X2.8 Brown
5.9 BTS3900 RF CableThe BTS3900 RF cables are the RF jumper and inter-RFU RF signal cable.
5.9.1 RF JumperThe RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchangebetween the base station and the antenna system.
5 BTS3900 CablesBTS3900
Hardware Description
5-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
5.9.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal CableThe inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals betweentwo RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on anotherRFU.
5.9.1 RF JumperThe RF jumper connects the RFU and the feeder of the antenna system for signal exchangebetween the base station and the antenna system.
ExteriorFigure 5-119 shows an RF jumper.
Figure 5-119 RF jumper
(1) DIN straight male connector (2) DIN elbow male connector
NOTE
Macro base stations use super-flexible 1/2-inch jumpers.
5.9.2 Inter-RFU RF Signal CableThe inter-RFU RF signal cable is used for transmitting the received diversity signals betweentwo RFUs. The cable connects the RX IN port on one RFU and the RX OUT port on anotherRFU.
StructureFigure 5-120 shows the inter-RFU RF signal cable.
Figure 5-120 Inter-RFU RF signal cable
(1) QMA elbow male connector
BTS3900Hardware Description 5 BTS3900 Cables
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
5-91
6 BTS3900 Auxiliary Equipment
About This Chapter
This chapter describes the auxiliary equipment of the BTS3900.
6.1 PS4890 CabinetThe PS4890 cabinet is designed based on the BTS3900 cabinet. The PS4890 cabinet houses thepower equipment and modules such as the DCDU-04 and DCDU-03. For details, see the PS4890User Guide.
6.2 EMUThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitorsenvironmental conditions of the equipment room.
6.3 DDFThis section describes the structure, functions, features, and technical specifications of the DDF.
BTS3900Hardware Description 6 BTS3900 Auxiliary Equipment
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-1
6.1 PS4890 CabinetThe PS4890 cabinet is designed based on the BTS3900 cabinet. The PS4890 cabinet houses thepower equipment and modules such as the DCDU-04 and DCDU-03. For details, see the PS4890User Guide.
Figure 6-1 shows the cable connections between the BTS3900 and the PS4890.
Figure 6-1 Cable connections between the BTS3900 and the PS4890
Table 6-1 lists the cables between the BTS3900 and the PS4890.
Table 6-1 Cables between the BTS3900 and the PS4890
SN Cable
P1, P2 For details, see Output Power Cable for theDCDU-04
6 BTS3900 Auxiliary EquipmentBTS3900
Hardware Description
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)
SN Cable
S1 For details, see 5.8.1 Monitoring Signal Cable forthe PMU
6.2 EMUThe Environment Monitoring Unit (EMU) is an environmental monitoring device that monitorsenvironmental conditions of the equipment room.
The EMU connects to main equipment and performs monitoring functions through the alarmcables. The EMU performs the following functions:
l Provides monitoring ports for the temperature, humidity, water, infrared, door controlsensors, Boolean signals, analog signals, and output control signals.
l Provides the RS485 and RS232 ports for the communication with the base station.
For details about the structure and functions of the EMU, see HUAWEI QCKG1EMU UserGuide.
6.3 DDFThis section describes the structure, functions, features, and technical specifications of the DDF.
Structure
Figure 6-2 shows the structure of the DDF.
Figure 6-2 Structure of the DDF
(1) Alarm module (2) Digital distributionmodule
(3) Digital distributionmodule
(4) Baffle plate (5) Wall-mountingpieces
BTS3900Hardware Description 6 BTS3900 Auxiliary Equipment
Issue 04 (2011-02-15) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
6-3
FunctionThe DDF performs the following functions:l Transfers signals through the trunk cables between the communication devices and the
transmission devices.l Transfers signals through the alarm cables between the communication devices and the
external alarm devices.
FeatureThe DDF has the following features:l Provides wall-mounting pieces and supporting the installations in a 19-inch cabinet and on
a wall.l Transfers 16 alarm signals and eight E1s with each E1 grounded.l Supports wire punching from the front.
Technical SpecificationTable 6-2 describes the technical specifications of the DDF.
Table 6-2 Technical specifications of the DDF
Item Specification
Dimensions (height x width x depth) 44 mm x 483 mm x 59 mm
Weight 1 kg
Working rate 2 Mbit/s
Characteristic impedance 120 ohms
Inter-wire-bundle cross noise preventionclass
≥ 60 dB
Insertion loss ≤ 0.4 dB
Return loss ≥ 18 dB
6 BTS3900 Auxiliary EquipmentBTS3900
Hardware Description
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Issue 04 (2011-02-15)